JP6773716B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). There is a machine (so-called pachinko machine) configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or is in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, scaling or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Some such game machines are configured to include a volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume and a brightness adjusting operating means for performing the brightness adjustment. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that the volume is adjusted by operating the cross direction controller to the left or right, and the brightness is adjusted by operating the cross direction controller in the upward or downward direction. Further, it is described that when an operation for adjusting the volume and an operation for adjusting the brightness are detected at the same time, both the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment cannot be controlled.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-147020

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 does not execute a process of adjusting either the volume or the brightness when the operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed. May decrease.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in the effect of the effect.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a volume adjusting operating means for adjusting the volume (for example, an upward pressing operation unit 130a of a cross key 130 and a downward direction). Volume adjustment based on the operation unit 130b), the brightness adjustment operation means for adjusting the brightness (for example, the leftward pressing operation unit 130c and the rightward operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and the volume adjustment operation means. The adjusting means includes an adjusting means (for example, a portion for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the process of performing the brightness adjusting and the process of performing the brightness adjusting based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operating means. When the volume lowering operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the brightness increasing operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the volume lowering process is preferentially executed (for example, step S4009 in the effect control microcomputer 100). A portion for executing S4010. Refer to the process of timing T1 shown in FIG. 20. Further, a specific effect means for executing a specific effect for maintaining the mode of the effect (for example, a specific effect for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). The effect control CPU 90120 or the like that can execute the effect, and the suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the count-up advance notice effect) that suggests the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state, as a specific effect. , a period (to maintain the sub image display device 9051 vertically) to maintain the first aspect, Ru racemate different and (duration of maintaining sideways sub image display apparatus 9051) period for maintaining the second aspect it is possible, expectation length between the second phase is in the case when the second length of the first length, depending on, is controlled to an advantageous beneficial state for the player but varies, (e.g., at the time when the specific effect is executed, the more times the sub image display device 9051 is maintained sideways long, the high jackpot expectation, etc.) the suggested demonstration execution means, said second In the period, it is possible to execute a common suggestion effect between the first suggestion effect and the second length, and the suggestion effect is more than the first suggestion effect and the first suggestion effect. The second suggestion effect, which has a high degree of expectation, can be executed, and the second suggestion effect is easier to execute in the second period than in the first period . According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

(Means 2) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a volume adjusting operating means for adjusting the volume (for example, an upward pressing operation unit of the cross key 130). 130a and downward operation unit 130b), brightness adjustment operation means for performing brightness adjustment (for example, leftward pressing operation unit 130c and rightward operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and volume adjustment operation means. It is provided with an adjusting means (for example, a portion for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a process of adjusting the volume based on the process and a process of adjusting the brightness based on the operation of the luminance adjusting operating means. The adjusting means preferentially executes the process of lowering the brightness when the operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operating means and the operation of raising the volume by the volume adjusting operating means are performed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). A portion for executing steps S4011 and S4012 in the above. Refer to the process of timing T2 shown in FIG. 20. Further, the orientation of the specific effect means (for example, the sub-image display device 9051) capable of executing the specific effect that maintains the mode of the effect. It is provided with an effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing a specific effect to be maintained, and a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a count-up notice effect) suggesting the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. As a specific effect, a period for maintaining the first aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in portrait orientation) and a period for maintaining the second aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in landscape orientation) are set. different it is possible Ru racemate, the length between the second phase in response to, at the time of the first length of time and a second length, the control advantageously favorable conditions for the player Ri expectation that the Do different is, (e.g., at the time when the specific effect is executed, the more times the sub image display device 9051 is maintained sideways long, the high jackpot expectation, etc.) the suggested demonstration execution means In the second period, it is possible to execute a common suggestion effect between the first length and the second length, and as the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect and the first suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the second suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation than the suggestion effect, and it is characterized in that the second suggestion effect is easier to execute in the second period than in the first period. To do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the adjusting means is either the volume or the brightness when the volume raising operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the brightness raising operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed. Priority is given to the process of raising one of them (for example, when the brightness up operation and the volume up operation are performed at the same time as shown in the modification A, one of the volume and the brightness is predetermined. It may be configured to give priority to the other one and raise the setting level). According to such a configuration, the volume and the brightness can be preferably adjusted.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to the means 3, the adjusting means has a volume and a brightness when the volume adjusting operation means reduces the volume and the brightness adjusting operation means reduces the brightness. Priority is given to the process of lowering either one of the above (for example, as shown in the modified example B, when the brightness down operation and the volume down operation are performed at the same time, either the volume or the brightness is executed. It may be configured to give priority to one of the predetermined ones and lower the setting level). According to such a configuration, the volume and the brightness can be preferably adjusted.

(Means 5) In the means 1 or the means 2, when the volume adjusting operation means increases the volume and the brightness adjusting operation means increases the brightness, the adjusting means is a production stage of the volume and the brightness. Is configured to give priority to the process of raising the lower value (for example, the portion where steps S4013 to S4016 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are executed. See the processes of timings T3 and T4 shown in FIG. 20). May be good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1, means 2 or means 5, when the adjusting means performs an operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjusting operating means and an operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operating means, the adjusting means is performed. The process of lowering the higher of the volume and the brightness is preferentially executed (for example, the portion where steps S4017 to S4019 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are executed. Refer to the processes of timings T5 and T6 shown in FIG. 20. .) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

(Means 7) In any of the means 1 to the means 6, the adjusting means is executed before the operation is performed when the operation by the volume adjusting operating means and the operation by the brightness adjusting operating means are performed. Priority is given to the process of adjusting either the volume or the brightness based on the effect (for example, steps S4005 to S4008 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are executed, and the dialogue notice effect is executed immediately before. If this is done, the volume adjustment may be prioritized and executed, and if the flash advance notice effect is executed immediately before, the brightness adjustment may be preferentially executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

(Means 8) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting a player's movement in any of means 1 to 7 and a detection means. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a part where the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode) based on the detection of a predetermined motion (for example, repeated hits) performed by the player a plurality of times. The detection means includes the specific effect execution means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes the advance notice effect process and the processing during the big hit game), and the detection means is the first detection means (for example, the second detection means). The specific effect executing means includes a first push button in the embodiment) and a second detecting means different from the first detecting means (for example, a second push button in the second embodiment), and the specific effect executing means is a player. It is possible to execute the specific effect by assuming that the predetermined operation has been executed based on the specific operation (for example, long press) different from the predetermined operation according to (for example, the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment gives a notice. A predetermined operation is detected by both the first detection means and the second detection means), which executes the effect processing and the processing during the big hit game and updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits toward the final mode by automatic continuous hitting. In this case, it is possible to execute the specific effect more than when the predetermined operation is detected by only one of the first detection means and the second detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 is in S361 of the advance notice effect process). The part where the value of the continuous hit count counter is incremented by 1 depending on whether the first push button is operated and the second push button is determined in S368, or the first push button in S441 of the jackpot game processing. A specific operation is detected by both the first detection means and the second detection means) in the case where it is determined that there is an operation and the case where it is determined in S448 that the second push button is operated). If (for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set in S373 of the advance notice effect process or S453 of the jackpot process. In this case, the specific effect can be executed with the same speed as when the specific operation is detected by only one of the first detection means and the second detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 performs the advance notice effect process). In S373 and S453 of the jackpot game processing, the first push button long press determination flag And when it is determined that the second push button long press determination flag is set, and in S374 of the advance notice effect processing and S454 of the jackpot game processing, it is determined that the first push button long press determination flag is set. In that case, when it is determined that the second push button long press determination flag is set in S375 of the advance notice effect processing and S455 of the big hit game processing, the value of the auto repeated hit count counter is incremented by +1). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 9) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the movement of a player in any one of the means 1 to the means 8 and a detection means. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a part where the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode) based on the detection of a predetermined motion (for example, repeated hits) performed by the player a plurality of times. The detection means includes the specific effect execution means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes the advance notice effect process and the process during the big hit game), and the detection means is the first detection means (for example, the second detection means). The specific effect executing means includes a first push button in the embodiment) and a second detecting means different from the first detecting means (for example, a second push button in the second embodiment), and the specific effect executing means is a player. It is possible to execute the specific effect on the assumption that the predetermined operation is executed based on the specific operation (for example, long press) different from the predetermined operation according to (for example, the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment gives a notice. (A part where the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode by executing the effect processing and the processing during the big hit game), when the specific operation is detected by the first detection means and specified by the second detection means It is possible to execute a specific effect with the same speed as when the motion is detected (for example, when the player presses and holds the first push button and the second push button is pressed as shown in FIG. 27B). In both cases, the long-press determination period is the same 0.2 seconds, so the display mode of the meter for repeated hits can be updated toward the final mode at the same speed). You may. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 10) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the movement of a player in any one of the means 1 to the means 9 and a detection means. Based on the fact that the player's movement is detected over a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds, which is the long press determination interval), the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode. The detection means includes a specific effect executing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes a notice effect process and a jackpot game in-game process), and the detection means is the first detection. Specific means including means (for example, the first push button in the second embodiment) and a second detection means different from the first detection means (for example, the second push button in the second embodiment). In the effect executing means, after the operation is detected in one of the first detecting means and the second detecting means for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than a predetermined period, the other is used for a predetermined period. When the motion is detected over a shorter second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the specific effect is not executed even if the total of the first period and the second period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period (for example, a game). When a person presses and holds the first push button for 0.15 seconds and then presses and holds the second push button for 0.05 seconds, the sum of the first period and the second period is the long press determination interval. It may be configured so that the update of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by automatic repeated hits is not executed even though it is 0.2 seconds). According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 11) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the movement of a player in any one of the means 1 to the means 10 and a detection means. Based on the fact that the player's movement is detected over a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds, which is the long press determination interval), the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated toward the final mode. A specific effect executing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 101 in the second embodiment executes a notice effect process or a jackpot game in-game process) is provided, and the detection means is the first detection unit. Specific means including means (for example, the first push button in the second embodiment) and a second detection means different from the first detection means (for example, the second push button in the second embodiment). After the operation is detected in one of the first detecting means and the second detecting means for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than a predetermined period, the effect executing means has a predetermined period in the other. When the motion is detected over a shorter second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the specific effect can be executed when the sum of the first period and the second period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example). , When the player presses and holds the first push button for 0.15 seconds and then presses and holds the second push button for 0.05 seconds, the total of the first period and the second period is the long press determination interval. It may be configured such that the update of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by automatic repeated hits is executed based on 0.2 seconds. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 12) A detection means (for example, a first push button and a second push button in the second embodiment) capable of detecting the movement of a player in any one of the means 1 to the means 11 and a detection means. As the effect related to the effect, at least the first effect (for example, displaying an image of a push button) and the second effect (for example, displaying a message prompting the operation of a push button) can be executed (for example, a second embodiment). The effect control CPU 101 in the above includes a notice effect process and a portion that executes a big hit game process), and the detection means includes a first detection means (for example, a first push button in the second embodiment) and the first push button. The effect executing means executes the first effect and the second effect as the effect related to the first detection means, including a second detection means (for example, a second push button in the second embodiment) different from the first detection means. It is possible (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 101 executes an image display of the first push button and a display of a message prompting the operation of the first push button), and the first effect and the second effect are as effects related to the second detection means. (For example, the portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the image display of the second push button and the display of the message prompting the operation of the second push button), and the first effect relating to the first detection means is the second. The effect intensity is stronger than the first effect related to the detection means (for example, the portion where the image of the first push button is displayed but the image of the second push button is not displayed), and the second effect related to the first detection means is the second effect. 2 The effect is stronger than the second effect related to the detection means (for example, a part that displays a message prompting the operation of the first push button but does not display a message prompting the operation of the second push button). It may have been done. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following (means 13) to (means 18). Conventionally, in a game machine, there has been a game machine capable of performing an effect that maintains the mode of the effect, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576. However, although the conventional gaming machine described above makes it possible to execute an effect that maintains the aspect of the effect, it is not possible to pay attention to the period during which the aspect of the effect is maintained. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine that can pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

(Means 13) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and maintains the aspect of the effect. A period for maintaining the first aspect as the specific effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing the specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051) is provided. It is possible to perform different effects between the period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the vertical orientation and the period for maintaining the second aspect (the period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal orientation). The degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the length of the maintenance period (for example, the longer the time that the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways when the specific effect is executed, the greater the expectation of a big hit. High degree, etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

(Means 14) In the means 13, when the second aspect is maintained, other effects with a high expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state can be obtained than when the first aspect is maintained. Easy to execute (for example, even if the count-up advance notice effect has the same number of counts by a predetermined character, the count-up advance notice effect is executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The jackpot expectation of is higher than the jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect that is executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in portrait orientation without executing the specific effect). Good.

According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the specific effect is controlled in an advantageous state by executing the other effect while the mode of the specific effect is maintained in the second aspect.

(Means 15) In the means 13 or the means 14, the notification effect means (for example, the sub-image display device 9051) capable of executing the notification effect for notifying that the mode of the specific effect has become the second aspect is turned sideways. A production control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing a notification effect to notify the fact may be further provided.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the mode of the specific effect has become the second mode.

(Means 16) In any of the means 13 to the means 15, as the specific effect, an effect that gradually changes from the first aspect to the second aspect can be executed in response to a plurality of variable displays. (For example, the pending change effect execution pattern HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-1 to HP7 shown in FIG. 55. ´-2 etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest over a plurality of variable displays.

(Means 17) In any one of the means 13 to the means 16, a predetermined effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a call advance notice effect) capable of executing a predetermined effect of a plurality of modes is further provided. The ratio of the specific effect mode to the second mode differs depending on whether the predetermined effect of the mode is executed (for example, when the call advance notice effect is executed, the call of the predetermined character is "spear". When it is "tough", a specific effect is executed, and there is a high possibility that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways, etc.).

According to this configuration, attention can be paid to a predetermined effect.

(Means 18) In any of the means 13 to the means 17, it is possible to execute the effect of changing from the first aspect to the second aspect and then changing to the first aspect a plurality of times during one variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 70, the effect of rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then rotating it vertically is executed a plurality of times during one variable display, etc.). , You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in one variable display.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the cross key. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the CPU in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the advance notice production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the luminance volume setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the luminance volume setting process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a specific example of brightness adjustment and volume adjustment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a big hit game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a big hit game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a big hit game in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the difference between the push button operation in the advance notice effect and the notification effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the long press performance of each push button. (A) is an explanatory diagram when only the first push button is repeatedly hit in the notice effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is repeatedly hit in the notice effect, and (C) is a notice. It is explanatory drawing when the 1st push button and the 2nd push button are repeatedly hit in the production. (A) is an explanatory diagram when only the first push button is long-pressed in the advance notice effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is long-pressed in the advance notice effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram when the first push button and the second push button are pressed and held at the same time in the advance notice effect, and (B) is the second push after the first push button is long pressed in the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing when the button is pressed and held. (A) is an explanatory diagram when only the first push button is repeatedly hit in the notification effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is repeatedly hit in the notification effect, and (C) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is repeatedly hit. It is explanatory drawing when the 1st push button and the 2nd push button are repeatedly hit in the production. (A) is an explanatory diagram when only the first push button is long-pressed in the notification effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram when only the second push button is long-pressed in the notification effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram when the first push button and the second push button are pressed and held at the same time in the notification effect, and (B) is the second push after the first push button is pressed and held in the notification effect. It is explanatory drawing when the button is pressed and held. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram showing an example of various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine of FIG. 34. It is a figure which shows an example of the main production control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure hold storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table for a big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the processing content executed in the command analysis processing. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of hold change effect setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of the hold change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of an action effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the hold change effect execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the hold change effect execution pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of the call notice effect. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of the count-up notice effect. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of a specific effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the specific effect execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the pseudo continuous production execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the count-up notice effect execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of the production at the time of development. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen.

Embodiment 1.
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game ball can flow down is formed.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". The symbol display area has "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized and fluctuated with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as a reach effect. Therefore, it can be said that the reach production is a production suggesting that it will be a big hit. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol following the effect symbol and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second symbol display area 9c for which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol described later. A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variation display of the effect symbol varies on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the production using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the variation display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production is diversifying, such as the production of production and the production of movable objects blocking all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, is it currently in the state of being in the variable display by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Whether or not it can be reliably recognized. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed in a variable manner with a constant operation, and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for a symbol may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized with each other. Note that "variable display is synchronized" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (display color different from the missed, for example, the missed). Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. Note that the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (normally big hit or probabilistic big hit). It remains lit. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the missed one). For example, it is displayed in blue when it is out of the way, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color is different depending on the type of big hit (normal big hit or probabilistic big hit). The display color of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d when the lights are turned off is assimilated with the background image and disappears when the lights are turned off. It is desirable that the display color is different from the image (for example, black).

In this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the fluctuation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Depending on whether it is displayed or not, it may be indicated whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol correspond to each other and separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, a fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized by using a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display in which different display colors are repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, for example. , The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by displaying the lights and turns off repeatedly at different time intervals. Further, for example, the same jackpot symbol is used when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol. However, the stop symbol of a different mode may be stopped and displayed.

On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and a concept including that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 14 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 13 than the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win in the second starting winning opening 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first starting winning opening 13 may be further narrowed, or the first starting winning opening may be further narrowed. The winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is made by arranging the nails densely around 13 or making it difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13. May be set to be higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 14 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second A variable winning ball device that opens and closes each of the starting winning openings 14 may be provided.

On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of second hold storages. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first hold storage display unit 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 9b for displaying the second hold storage number are provided. ing. The first hold storage display unit 9a displays the first hold display corresponding to each of the first hold storage. Further, the second hold storage display unit 9b displays the second hold display corresponding to each of the second hold storages. In this embodiment, the case where the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are displayed individually is shown, but the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is added. A total hold storage display unit for displaying the number of hold storages may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the variable display start condition. Further, in such a configuration, in the total hold storage display unit, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are displayed side by side in the order of winning the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. , The first hold memory or the second hold memory is displayed in a recognizable manner (for example, the first hold memory is displayed in red and the second hold memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the production symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the variation display of the special symbol transmits a variation pattern command that can specify the variation time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the variation pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the fluctuation time is specified based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol should be executed synchronously in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the fluctuation pattern command data is garbled, the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 100 There may be a gap between them. Therefore, in the event of an unexpected situation such as garbled command data, there is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol may not be completely synchronized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

The game area 6 is also provided with winning openings (ordinary winning openings) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of prize game balls determined in advance based on the winning of the game balls. The game balls that have won the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The ordinary symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, "○" and "x") called ordinary symbols.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol becomes visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp lights at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. .. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1. Further, a probabilistic state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display of a special symbol is increased as compared with the normal state. In the high probability state.), The probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

Decorative LEDs 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

In the members constituting the hitting ball supply plate 3, an operation button 120 as an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided on the hitting ball supply plate 3. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. The operation button 120 may be configured not only to be provided with a push button switch capable of being pressed by the player, but also to be provided with a dial capable of being rotated by the player. With such a configuration, the player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of an effect) by rotating the dial.

Further, on the left side of the operation button 120 on the ball hitting plate 3, a cross key 130 is also provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The cross key 130 is provided with push button switches that allow the player to perform pressing operations in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the first 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the second special symbol is displayed. 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, when a probabilistic jackpot occurs, the game is shifted to the so-called probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed, the game state is shifted to the high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won a prize (that is, a special symbol). The game shifts to a high base state, which is a game state controlled so that the execution conditions of the variable display on the displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily satisfied). In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not achieved. It becomes easier to win a starting prize.

It should be noted that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), the state shifts to a normal symbol probability variation state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, it may shift to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability variation state, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the starting winning state becomes easy (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is the probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 10 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 increases, and the start winning is easy to win (high base state).

Further, in this embodiment, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is also shifted to the time saving state (special symbol time saving state) in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the time saving state in this way, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol or the effect symbol is started more frequently (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is completed. It will be faster.) It is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, a valid start winning prize is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is performed increases.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a starting prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high). It may move to the base state).

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 also includes a random number circuit 53 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all thereof is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board 910. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 53 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start is generated at a random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the time when the winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data.

The random number circuit 53 has a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection function. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random number can be improved.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as ROM 54 (an ID number assigned by a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained above is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

Further, an input driver circuit 58 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. There is. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 that drives a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variably displaying a special symbol, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. It receives the effect control command and controls the display of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decorative LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. , The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the audio output board 70.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to the effect such as an effect symbol process flag. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 according to the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CG ROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player via the input port 107.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the cross key 130 in response to a pressing operation of the cross key 130 in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction by the player via the input port 107.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED or the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the LED or the lamp is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on the signal for driving the LED. Further, a current is supplied to a decorative LED 25 or the like provided on the game board side.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the cross key 130. As shown in FIG. 4, the cross key 130 includes an upward pressing operation unit 130a (a pressing operation unit on the back side when viewed from a player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1) and a downward pressing operation unit 130b. (Pressing operation unit on the front side when viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko game machine 1) and left direction operation unit 130c (on the left side when viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko game machine 1) A pressing operation unit) and a right-direction operation unit 130d (a pressing operation unit on the right side when viewed from a player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1) are provided. Then, the cross key 130 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the upward operation when the upward pressing operation unit 130a is pressed, and responds to the downward operation when the downward pressing operation unit 130b is pressed. When the leftward pressing operation unit 130c is pressed, the detection signal corresponding to the leftward operation is output, and when the rightward pressing operation unit 130d is pressed, the rightward operation is performed. Output the detection signal.

In this embodiment, expressions such as an upward operation and a downward operation of the cross key 130 are used, but specifically, from the viewpoint of the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. The upward pressing operation unit 130a provided on the back side is pressed, or the downward pressing operation unit 130a provided on the front side when viewed from the player sitting facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is pressed. To do.

In this embodiment, it is possible to adjust the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 by operating the cross key 130. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the volume can be adjusted by using the upward pressing operation unit 130a and the downward pressing operation unit 130b of the cross key 130, and the upward pressing operation unit 130a can be used. When the pressing operation is performed, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 can be increased, and when the downward pressing operation unit 130b is pressed, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 can be decreased. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, it is possible to adjust the brightness by using the leftward pressing operation unit 130c and the rightward pressing operation unit 130d of the cross key 130, and when the leftward pressing operation unit 130c is pressed. By increasing the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and pressing the rightward pressing operation unit 130d, the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 can be decreased.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. Is set to (step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as adding parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs game state recovery processing (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing) is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, the data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer). ), The part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command specifying a display result (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, small hit, or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 may also transmit the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command. Good. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the value of the variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the saved fluctuation time timer is restarted, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is restarted, and the data is saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been set timed out, the symbol confirmation specification command described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the saved special symbol process flag.

The CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of always transmitting the display result specification command when the power failure is restored. .. Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, the fluctuation time occurs during the power failure. It may be determined that the state is not present and the display result specification command may not be sent.

Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs during a power failure. It may be determined that it was not inside and the display result specification command may not be sent.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 53 (step S14). The CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 53 to update the value of the random number R, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and it is displayed. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to determine. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is one round (taking the random number for determining the normal symbol hit). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed by using the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of a sudden probability variation jackpot, the sudden probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, "135") is not a reach. May be displayed as stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). Regarding the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Take control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state. In the normal symbol process process of step S27, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 32, and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the variation display result of the normal symbol is displayed. When is hit, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state or in the closed state.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“○” and “×”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating "○" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not reach the reach state may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally out of place") variable display mode when the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after the reach state is reached, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "out of reach".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9 (however, in the case of a sudden probability change jackpot). In some cases, the probability change jackpot symbol (for example, "135") is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach.

When the small hit "5" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "sudden probability change big hit" in the effect display device 9. After the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the same manner as in the case of, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability change big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a variable display mode of "small hit". ..

Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to a number of times that the number of times the big winning opening is opened is smaller than that of the big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game is completed, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probabilistic state to the normal state or transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state. Further, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened a small number of times in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely long. A short jackpot and a jackpot that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probabilistic state. Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden change big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By controlling in this way, if the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so it is a high probability state for the player. (Probability change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the game machine is configured so that all the big hit types are probabilistic big hits, it is not necessary to provide the small hits. In addition, when a small hit is provided when all the jackpot types are probability variable jackpots, the sudden probability variable jackpot is only shifted to the probability variation state (high probability state) and is not accompanied by the time saving state (high base state). It is preferable to provide.

7 and 8 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 starts the first start winning opening 13 if the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won is turned on, that is, the first starting winning opening 13. If a prize has been won, the first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, if the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is turned on, the CPU 56 has generated a start winning to the second start winning opening 14. Then, the second start port switch passing process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any of the processes of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second starting opening switch 14a is not turned on, any of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total reserved memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If you want to make a big hit, set the big hit flag. When it is decided to make a big hit, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit type (for example, normal big hit, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit), and the decision result is stored in the big hit type buffer. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 issues a variation pattern command (an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol) according to the determined variation pattern. The fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started by controlling the transmission to. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

Display result specification command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to transmit a display result designation command (a production control command indicating whether or not a big hit is made, whether or not a small hit is made, and a big hit type) to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

Processing during special symbol change (step S303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 100. Controls to send a specified command (effect control command indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed), and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to the value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

Special symbol stop processing (step S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 is given a jackpot start designation command (normal jackpot or effect control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game based on a probability variation jackpot) or a small hit / sudden probability variation jackpot start designation. Controls to send a command (a production control command that specifies the start of a big hit game or a small hit game based on a sudden probability change big hit), and sets the internal state (special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). Update to. Further, when the small hit flag is set, the control is performed to transmit the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S308. Update to the corresponding value (8 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process is displayed as a special symbol. It is set in the output buffer for setting control data, and in the display control process of step S22, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S305): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, while controlling the transmission of the large winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the large winning opening opening processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The large winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the large winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game. Further, since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening, a different command for specifying the opening for the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted with a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the large winning opening, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to send a designated command to the effect control microcomputer 100 after the jackpot is opened, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this). In the example, update to 7).

Jackpot end processing (step S307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The effect control microcomputer 100 is given a jackpot end specification command (a production control command that specifies the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot) or a small hit / sudden probability variation jackpot end designation command (a jackpot game based on a sudden probability variation jackpot) It controls the transmission of an effect control command) for designating the end of the small hit game, and controls the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Small hit release preprocessing (step S308): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the process during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the large winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening preprocessing is performed by the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hit opening process (step S309): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Performs processing to confirm the establishment of the closing conditions for the grand prize opening. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and the number of times the big winning opening is opened still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S310 (10 in this example).

Small hit end process (step S310): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The effect control microcomputer 100 is controlled to transmit a small hit / sudden probability change large hit end designation command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is made to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Control for. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). ..

After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (step S705). In the effect control process process, the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) from each process according to the control state.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol is executed (step S707). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618). ).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end specification command (command A303 (H)) (step S627), the effect control CPU 101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit end specification command reception flag. (Step S628).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S629). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 executes a luminance volume setting process (step S800A) for setting the luminance of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27. In this embodiment, in the effect control process process, the luminance volume setting process (step S800A) is executed before the processes of steps S800 to S807, so that in addition to the variable display of the effect symbol, during the big hit game or It is possible to adjust the brightness and volume even during the customer waiting demonstration display in which neither the variable display nor the big hit game is performed.

In this embodiment, the case where the brightness volume setting process is executed in the effect control process process is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9, the luminance volume setting process may be executed before or after the effect control process process.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs any of the processes of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process. It should be noted that even if the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are configured to be executed by different effect control process processes. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is executed depending on which effect control process process is executing the variation display of the effect symbol.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

Processing during effect symbol change (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Processing during the round (step S805): Display control during the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

Round post-processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is normally transmitted. , The effect symbol variation start processing is started based on the reception of the variation pattern command, and the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Therefore, the effect symbol variation only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the variation pattern command. The display does not start.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays a display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8002). That is, by executing the process of step S8002 by the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, in step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 uses a chance pattern symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step S8002, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal big hit", the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number symbols as the stop symbols. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit", the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off", a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, the combination of the effect symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. Further, in this embodiment, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the left, middle, and right sides are stopped and displayed with odd-numbered symbols aligned, so that the odd-numbered symbols are reminiscent of the probabilistic jackpot. A symbol that reminds us of a probabilistic jackpot is called a probabilistic symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a normal big hit occurs, the left, middle, and right sides are stopped and displayed with even-numbered symbols aligned, so that the even-numbered symbols do not become a probabilistic big hit (usually a big hit). .. A symbol that reminds us that it does not become a probabilistic jackpot is called a non-probable variation symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the advance notice effect setting process for setting the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect (step S8003).

In step S8003, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display started this time is a big hit, and if it is a big hit change, the effect control CPU 101 serves as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect. Select the advance notice production decision table for. Further, in the case of deviation fluctuation, the advance notice effect determination table for deviation is selected as the table for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect. Whether or not the variable display started this time is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected advance notice effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the advance notice effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 15 (A) shows a specific example of the notice effect determination table for the loss selected when the fluctuation is the loss. Further, FIG. 15B shows a specific example of a notice effect determination table for a big hit selected when the big hit fluctuates. As shown in FIG. 15, judgment values are assigned to the advance notice effect determination table for no advance notice effect, character advance notice effect, button advance notice effect, group advance notice effect, dialogue advance notice effect, and flash advance notice effect. .. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the determination value is assigned so that the rate at which one of the advance notice effects is executed is higher than in the case of the loss. There is.

Among the advance notice effects shown in FIG. 15, the "line notice effect" is a advance notice effect executed by displaying the character on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and outputting the voice of the character's dialogue from the speaker 27. .. Therefore, in this embodiment, it can be said that the "speech notice effect" is a notice effect executed mainly by the sound output from the speaker 27. Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, in addition to the sound output from the speaker 27, the character display of the character's dialogue may be displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

Further, the "flash notice effect" is a notice effect executed by performing a flash display on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Therefore, in this embodiment, it can be said that the "flash notice effect" is a notice effect executed mainly on the intensity of the brightness on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

The advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display of the effect pattern is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and various types of advance notice effects such as step-up notice effect, motif notice effect, and mini character notice effect are performed. It may be configured to be feasible.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a case where the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect is determined depending on whether or not it is a big hit is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of whether or not it is a big hit, or in addition to whether or not it is a big hit, the presence or absence and type of the advance notice effect may be determined according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, for example, the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect may be determined according to the presence / absence of normal reach, the presence / absence of super reach, and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a case is shown in which any one of the advance notice effects can be executed during one change display of the effect symbols, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, it may be configured so that the execution of a plurality of advance notice effects can be determined at the same time, and the execution of a plurality of advance notice effects can be executed during one variable display of the effect symbols.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the advance notice effect determined in the advance notice effect setting process (step S8003) (step S8004). Then, the process proceeds to step S8005.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8004 (step S8005).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and controls to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern. In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 serves as an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component 9) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8006). For example, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8007).

Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the variation time timer (step S8102).

Next, when the process timer times out (step S8103), the effect control CPU 101 switches the process data. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the dialogue advance notice effect when the execution of the dialogue advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect setting process (see step S8003) (step S8106). ). It should be noted that whether or not it is the end timing of the dialogue advance notice effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8007 of the effect symbol variation start process. If it is the end timing of the dialogue advance notice effect (Y in step S8106), the effect control CPU 101 sets a dialogue advance notice execution flag indicating that the dialogue advance notice effect has been executed in the variable display of the effect symbol. (Step S8107). Then, the process proceeds to step S8110.

Unless it is decided to execute the dialogue advance notice effect, or if it is not the end timing of the dialogue advance notice effect (N in step S8106), the effect control CPU 101 performs a flash advance notice in the advance notice effect setting process (see step S8003). When it is decided to execute the effect, it is confirmed whether or not it is the end timing of the flash notice effect (step S8108). Whether or not the end timing of the flash notice effect is reached can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8007 of the effect symbol variation start process. If it is the end timing of the flash advance notice effect (Y in step S8108), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flash advance notice execution flag indicating that the flash advance notice effect has been executed in the variable display of the effect symbol. (Step S8109). Then, the process proceeds to step S8110.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8110), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8111).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first resets the dialogue advance notice execution flag or the flash advance notice execution flag, if set (step S8300).

In this embodiment, when the dialogue advance notice effect or the flash advance notice effect is executed during the change display of the effect symbol, the dialogue advance notice executed flag or the flash advance notice executed flag is reset at the end of the change of the effect symbol. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to reset the dialogue advance notice executed flag and the flash advance notice executed flag based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the dialogue advance notice effect and the flash advance notice effect are finished. ..

Further, for example, when a plurality of advance notice effects are enabled to be executed during one change display of the effect symbol, after the dialogue advance notice effect is finished and the dialogue advance notice execution flag is set, the flash notice effect is produced. Switch from the dialogue advance notice executed flag to the flash advance notice executed flag and set (reset the dialogue advance notice executed flag and set the flash advance notice executed flag) based on the end of After setting the flash advance notice executed flag, switch from the flash advance notice executed flag to the dialogue advance notice executed flag based on the end of the dialogue advance notice production (reset the flash advance notice executed flag and set the dialogue advance notice executed flag. May be set).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Without fail, the process proceeds to step S8305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 controls to confirm and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step). S8302). When neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 shifts to step S8311.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag is set or the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command is received is set (step S8305). .. When the jackpot start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and responds to the fanfare effect. Select the process table (step S8307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is controlled (step S8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 responds to the effect pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) by changing the value of the effect control process flag. Update to the value (step S8311).

18 and 19 are flowcharts showing the luminance volume setting process (step S800A) in the effect control process process. In the luminance volume setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the luminance adjustment operation using the cross key 130 has been detected (step S4000). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the left-direction pressing operation unit 130c or the right-direction pressing operation unit 130d of the cross key 130 shown in FIG. 4 is input. If the luminance adjustment operation is not detected (N in step S4000), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 130 is detected (step S4001). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a or the downward pressing operation unit 130b of the cross key 130 shown in FIG. 4 is input. If the volume adjustment operation is detected (Y in step S4001), that is, if only the volume adjustment operation is detected, the effect control CPU 101 changes the volume setting according to the volume adjustment operation (Y). Step S4002). Specifically, when the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a is input, the volume setting is raised by one step, and when the detection signal from the downward pressing operation unit 130b is input, the volume setting is set to 1. Step down.

If the luminance adjustment operation is detected (Y in step S4000), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 130 is detected (step S4003). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a or the downward pressing operation unit 130b of the cross key 130 shown in FIG. 4 is input. If the volume adjustment operation is not detected (N in step S4003), that is, if only the brightness adjustment operation is detected, the effect control CPU 101 changes the brightness setting according to the brightness adjustment operation (N). Step S4004). Specifically, when the detection signal from the left-direction pressing operation unit 130c is input, the brightness setting is raised by one step, and when the detection signal from the right-direction pressing operation unit 130d is input, the brightness setting is set to 1. Step down.

If the volume adjustment operation is detected in step S4003 (Y in step S4003), it is the case that both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the dialogue advance notice execution flag is set (step S4005). If the dialogue advance notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the volume adjustment operation and changes the volume setting according to the volume adjustment operation (step S4006). Specifically, when the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a is input, the volume setting is raised by one step, and when the detection signal from the downward pressing operation unit 130b is input, the volume setting is set to 1. Step down.

The fact that the dialogue advance notice execution flag is set means that it is in the state immediately after executing the dialogue advance notice effect during the variable display of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, as described above, since the dialogue warning effect is a notification effect executed mainly by the sound output from the speaker 27, the volume adjustment operation is the intention of the player to operate correctly. Can be estimated. Therefore, in this embodiment, when both the luminance adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time by executing the processes of steps S400 and S4006, and immediately after the execution of the serif notice effect, It is configured to give priority to the volume setting.

If the dialogue advance notice execution flag is not set (N in step S4005), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the flash advance notice execution flag is set (step S4007). If the flash advance notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the luminance adjustment operation and changes the luminance setting according to the luminance adjustment operation (step S4008). Specifically, when the detection signal from the left-direction pressing operation unit 130c is input, the brightness setting is raised by one step, and when the detection signal from the right-direction pressing operation unit 130d is input, the brightness setting is set to 1. Step down.

The fact that the flash advance notice executed flag is set means that the state immediately after executing the flash advance notice effect during the variable display of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, as described above, since the flash advance notice effect is a advance notice effect executed mainly on the intensity of the brightness on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the brightness adjustment operation is performed by the player. It can be presumed that the intention is correct operation. Therefore, in this embodiment, when both the luminance adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time by executing the processes of steps S4007 and S4008, and immediately after the execution of the flash notice effect, It is configured to give priority to the brightness setting.

If the flash notice execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs the detected brightness adjustment operation and volume adjustment operation as a brightness up operation (operation for increasing the brightness setting) and a volume down operation (volume setting). It is confirmed whether or not it is a combination with (operation for lowering) (step S4009). Specifically, whether or not the combination of the brightness up operation and the volume down operation is determined by the detection signal from the leftward pressing operation unit 130c of the cross key 130 and the detection signal from the downward pressing operation unit 130b. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is the case where. If it is a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume down operation, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the volume down operation and lowers the volume setting by one step (step S4010).

Unless it is a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume down operation, the effect control CPU 101 has the detected brightness adjustment operation and volume adjustment operation of the brightness down operation (operation for lowering the brightness setting) and the volume up operation (volume). It is confirmed whether or not it is a combination with the operation for raising the setting of (step S4011). Specifically, whether or not the combination of the brightness down operation and the volume up operation is determined by the detection signal from the rightward pressing operation unit 130d of the cross key 130 and the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is the case where. If it is a combination of the brightness down operation and the volume up operation, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the brightness down operation and lowers the brightness setting by one step (step S4012).

If it is not a combination of the brightness down operation and the volume up operation, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the detected brightness adjustment operation and volume adjustment operation are a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume up operation ( Step S4013). Whether or not the combination of the brightness up operation and the volume up operation is specifically determined by the detection signal from the leftward pressing operation unit 130c of the cross key 130 and the detection signal from the upward pressing operation unit 130a. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is the case where. If it is a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume up operation, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the current brightness setting level is higher than the current volume setting level (step S4014). If the current brightness setting level is higher than the current volume setting level, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the volume up operation and raises the volume setting by one step (step S4015). On the other hand, if the current brightness setting level is not higher than the current volume setting level (that is, if the current brightness setting level is equal to or lower than the current volume setting level), the effect control CPU 101 increases the brightness. Prioritizing the operation, the brightness setting is raised by one step (step S4016).

The current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level may be the same, but in this embodiment, if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, Since the current brightness setting level is not larger than the current volume setting level, it is determined to be N in step S4014, the process proceeds to step S4016, and the brightness up operation is prioritized to raise the brightness setting by one step. It is configured as follows. Not limited to such a state, if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, the volume setting may be set to be raised by one step with priority given to the volume up operation. Good.

If it is not a combination of the brightness up operation and the volume up operation, it is a combination of the brightness down operation and the volume down operation. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the current brightness setting level is smaller than the current volume setting level (step S4017). If the current brightness setting level is smaller than the current volume setting level, the effect control CPU 101 gives priority to the volume down operation and lowers the volume setting by one step (step S4018). On the other hand, if the current brightness setting level is not smaller than the current volume setting level (that is, if the current brightness setting level is equal to or higher than the current volume setting level), the effect control CPU 101 reduces the brightness. Prioritizing the operation, the brightness setting is lowered by one step (step S4019).

The current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level may be the same, but in this embodiment, if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, Since the current brightness setting level is not smaller than the current volume setting level, it is determined to be N in step S4017 and the process proceeds to step S4019, giving priority to the brightness down operation and lowering the brightness setting by one step. It is configured as follows. Not limited to such a state, if the current brightness setting level and the current volume setting level are the same, the volume setting may be set to be lowered by one step with priority given to the volume down operation. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, the input itself of both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation is accepted, and then the brightness volume setting process is performed. The case where the brightness adjustment and the volume adjustment processing is performed by determining which of the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation is prioritized is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, the cross key 130 itself may be configured so as to output only the detection signal for either operation. In this case, for example, even when the brightness down operation and the volume up operation are performed at the same time, the cross key 130 may be configured to output only the detection signal for the brightness down operation.

Further, for example, when both the detection signal for the brightness adjustment operation and the detection signal for the volume adjustment operation are input at the same time, only one of the detection signals is input and the other detection signal is discarded. An input circuit or the like on the computer 100 side may be configured. In this case, for example, even if the detection signal for the brightness down operation and the detection signal for the volume up operation are input at the same time, the input circuit or the like inputs only the detection signal for the brightness down operation and the detection signal for the volume up operation. May be configured to discard.

Next, specific examples of brightness adjustment and volume adjustment will be described. FIG. 20 is a timing chart for explaining specific examples of brightness adjustment and volume adjustment. As shown in FIG. 20, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the brightness setting level can be set to 5 levels from level 1 to level 5, and the volume setting level can be set to 5 levels from level 1 to level 5. Suppose that Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the brightness setting level is set to level 4 and the volume setting level is set to level 3 as the initial state. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20, it will be described below assuming that it is not immediately after the dialogue advance notice effect or the flash advance notice effect is executed.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, the display screen of the effect display device 9 may be completely darkened by allowing the brightness setting level to be adjusted to level 0, or the volume setting level may be adjusted to level 0. It may be configured so that it can be completely muted if possible.

In the above state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T1 and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is the brightness. It is assumed that the operation was up and volume down. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, the volume down operation is prioritized, the volume setting level is changed from level 3 to level 2 by one step, and the brightness setting level is not changed at level 4 (step S4009). , S4010).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T2, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is the brightness down operation. It is assumed that the volume was increased. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, the brightness down operation is prioritized, the brightness setting level is changed from level 4 to level 3 by one step, and the volume setting level is not changed as level 2 (step S4011). , S4012).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T3, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is the brightness up operation. It is assumed that the volume was increased. In this case, at the timing T3, since the current luminance setting level is level 3 and the current luminance setting level is 2, the current luminance setting level is larger than the current luminance setting level (step S4014). (Refer to), as shown in FIG. 20, the volume up operation is prioritized, the volume setting level is changed from level 2 to level 3 by one step, and the brightness setting level is not changed at level 3 (step S4015). reference).

After that, it is assumed that the brightness setting level is changed to level 2 and the volume setting level is maintained at level 3. In this state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T4, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations increases the brightness. It is assumed that the operation and the volume up operation were performed. In this case, at the timing T4, since the current luminance setting level is level 2 and the current luminance setting level is 3, the current luminance setting level is smaller than the current luminance setting level (step S4014). (Refer to), as shown in FIG. 20, the brightness up operation is prioritized, the brightness setting level is changed from level 2 to level 3 by one step, and the volume setting level is not changed at level 3 (step S4016). reference).

After that, it is assumed that the brightness setting level is changed to level 2 and the volume setting level is maintained at level 3. In this state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T5, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is reduced in brightness. It is assumed that the operation and the volume down operation were performed. In this case, since the current luminance setting level is level 2 and the current luminance setting level is 3 at the timing T5, the current luminance setting level is smaller than the current luminance setting level (step S4017). (See), as shown in FIG. 20, the volume down operation is prioritized, the volume setting level is changed from level 3 to level 2 by one step, and the brightness setting level is not changed at level 2 (step S4018). reference).

After that, it is assumed that the brightness setting level is changed to level 3 and the volume setting level is maintained at level 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 20, it is assumed that the operation using the cross key 130 is performed at the timing T6, and the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are detected at the same time, and the combination of the detected operations is reduced in brightness. It is assumed that the operation and the volume down operation were performed. In this case, since the current luminance setting level is level 3 and the current luminance setting level is 2 at the timing T6, the current luminance setting level is larger than the current luminance setting level (step S4017). (Refer to), as shown in FIG. 20, the brightness down operation is prioritized, the brightness setting level is changed from level 3 to level 2 by one step, and the brightness setting level is not changed as level 2 (step S4019). reference).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, the case where the range of the brightness setting level and the volume setting level are both the same in the five stages of levels 1 to 5 is shown. The setting stage may be different depending on the brightness setting level and the volume setting level. For example, the brightness setting level can be adjusted in three stages of levels 1 to 3, while the volume setting level may be adjusted in 10 stages of levels 1 to 10. In this case, for example, when the brightness setting level is level 3 and the volume setting level is level 7, the apparent numerical level is higher at level 7, but the brightness setting level is higher. Is the maximum value of level 3, so it is judged that the brightness production stage is higher (brightness is higher than the current setting level), and either brightness or volume is prioritized for brightness or volume. May be adjusted.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (in this example, the upward pressing operation unit 130a and the downward operation unit 130b of the cross key 130) and the brightness. A process for adjusting the brightness based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operation means (in this example, the left pressing operation unit 130c and the right operating unit 130d of the cross key 130) for adjusting the volume. And, it is possible to execute a process of adjusting the brightness based on the operation of the brightness adjustment operating means. Further, when the volume lowering operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the brightness increasing operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the volume lowering process is preferentially executed (see the process of timing T1 shown in FIG. 20). .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, when both the operation of lowering the volume and the operation of increasing the brightness are performed, the priority is given to the case where the player feels that the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 is too loud and noisy. Since it is considered to be high, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered by preferentially executing the process of lowering the volume.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means and the operation of raising the volume by the volume adjusting operation means are performed, the process of lowering the brightness is preferentially executed (FIG. 20). Refer to the processing of timing T2 shown in (1). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, when both the operation of lowering the brightness and the operation of raising the volume are performed, the priority is given to the case where the player feels that the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is too high and dazzling. Since it is considered to be high, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered by preferentially executing the process of lowering the brightness.

Further, according to this embodiment, when an operation of raising the volume by the volume adjusting operation means and an operation of raising the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the lower of the volume and the brightness is raised. The processing is preferentially executed (see the processing at timings T3 and T4 shown in FIG. 20). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, when both the volume raising operation and the brightness raising operation are performed, it is considered that the lower the current production stage (setting level), the more room for raising the production stage and the higher the priority. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered by preferentially executing the process of increasing the lower of the effect and the brightness.

In this embodiment, when both the volume raising operation and the brightness raising operation are performed, a case is shown in which the process of raising the volume and the brightness, whichever has the lower production stage, is preferentially executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, conversely, when both the volume raising operation and the brightness raising operation are performed, the process of raising the volume and the brightness, whichever has the higher production stage, may be preferentially executed. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, when the brightness up operation and the volume up operation are performed at the same time, a process of raising the setting level by giving priority to the lower current setting level of the volume and the brightness is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the brightness up operation and the volume up operation are performed at the same time, one of the volume and the brightness, whichever is predetermined, may be prioritized to raise the set level (modification example). A). With such a configuration, the volume and brightness can be preferably adjusted.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjusting operation means and the operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the higher of the volume and the brightness is lowered. The processing is preferentially executed (see the processing at timings T5 and T6 shown in FIG. 20). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, when both the volume lowering operation and the brightness lowering operation are performed, it is considered that the higher the current production stage (setting level), the more room for lowering the production stage and the higher the priority. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered by preferentially executing the process of lowering the higher of the effect and the brightness.

In this embodiment, when both the volume lowering operation and the brightness lowering operation are performed, a case is shown in which the process of raising the volume and the brightness, whichever is higher, is preferentially executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, conversely, when both the volume lowering operation and the brightness lowering operation are performed, the process of lowering the lower volume and brightness of the volume and brightness may be preferentially executed. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, when the brightness down operation and the volume down operation are performed at the same time, the process of lowering the setting level by giving priority to the higher current setting level of the volume and the brightness is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the brightness down operation and the volume down operation are performed at the same time, one of the volume and the brightness, whichever is predetermined, may be prioritized to lower the set level (modification example). B). With such a configuration, the volume and brightness can be preferably adjusted.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the volume and the brightness are determined based on the effect executed before the operation is performed. Priority is given to the process of adjusting one of them (in this example, if the dialogue advance notice effect is executed immediately before, the volume adjustment is given priority and the flash advance notice effect is executed immediately before. For example, priority is given to brightness adjustment). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. That is, immediately after the dialogue warning effect executed mainly by the sound output from the speaker 27, the volume adjustment is preferentially executed, and the flash advance notice is executed mainly by the intensity of the brightness on the display screen of the effect display device 9. By preferentially executing the brightness adjustment immediately after the effect, the volume or the brightness can be adjusted in consideration of the player's intention, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

In this embodiment, if the dialogue advance notice effect is executed immediately before, the volume adjustment is prioritized and executed, and if the flash advance notice effect is executed immediately before, the brightness adjustment is preferentially executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when various notice effects other than the dialogue notice effect and the flash notice effect are configured to be executable, it is necessary to associate whether to execute the volume adjustment with priority or the brightness adjustment with priority for all the notice effects. It may be configured as.

Further, for example, when the configuration is such that the volume adjustment is preferentially executed or the brightness adjustment is preferentially executed for a plurality of advance notice effects as described above, the advance notice effect has a stronger effect intensity (for example). , The higher the volume of the advance notice effect, the higher the brightness of the advance notice effect), and the period in which the priority execution of the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is reflected may be longer. In this case, for example, in the effect symbol change processing and the effect symbol change stop process, the length of the period until the dialogue advance notice executed flag and the flash advance notice executed flag are reset is configured to be different according to the effect intensity. Just do it.

Further, in this embodiment, as the volume adjusting operation means and the brightness adjusting operating means, the upward pressing operation unit 130a and the downward pressing operation unit 130b, the leftward pressing operation unit 130c, and the rightward pressing of the cross key 130, respectively. Although the case where it is realized by the operation unit 130d is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, an operation button dedicated to volume adjustment and an operation button dedicated to brightness adjustment may be provided, and various modes of operation means can be considered.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 are adjusted is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the brightness and the amount of light of LEDs and lamps provided in the game machine such as the decorative LED 25 and the frame LED 28 may be adjustable, and the processing shown in this embodiment may be applied.

Further, not limited to brightness adjustment and volume adjustment, for example, when the execution frequency of a predetermined advance notice effect can be adjusted in a plurality of stages (for example, 1 to 5 stages), or when an operation button having a vibration function is provided, a vibration operation is performed. The strength may be adjustable in a plurality of steps (for example, 1 step to 5 steps), or various things may be adjusted so as to apply the configuration shown in this embodiment. ..

Further, in this embodiment, when the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, only one of the operations is enabled and the other operation is invalidated, so that one operation is prioritized. Although shown, the method of prioritizing one of the operations is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time, the adjustment process based on the priority operation is executed first, and then the adjustment process based on the other operation is executed. You may.

Embodiment 2.
In the first embodiment, it may be configured to further include a so-called automatic continuous striking function that detects that the continuous striking operation is being performed based on the continuation of the long press operation. Hereinafter, a second embodiment configured to have an automatic continuous striking function will be described.

In this embodiment, detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and a portion different from that of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

Further, in this embodiment, instead of the operation button 120 shown in the first embodiment, a stick controller that the player can grasp and tilt near the center of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 (Not shown) and a first push button (not shown) that can be operated by the player by pressing operation or the like are provided, and the player can operate by pressing operation or the like at a position near the ball striking operation handle 5. It is assumed that a second push button (not shown) is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the jackpot types include "probability variation A" and "non-probability variation", which are 16 round jackpots, and "probability variation B", which is a 5-round jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, in the effect symbol changing process (step S802), the effect control CPU 101 executes the advance notice effect process for executing the advance notice effect.

21 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the advance notice effect processing in the second embodiment. In the advance notice effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the advance notice effect execution flag is set, that is, whether or not the advance notice effect is started (S331).

When the advance notice effect execution flag is not set (S331; N), in S332, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer to -1. The timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set in the selection of the process table when it is decided to perform the advance notice effect in the effect symbol variation start process. If the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is not out of the timer (S333; N), the process ends. When the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is out, that is, when it is the start timing of the advance notice effect (S333; Y), the process proceeds to S334.

In S334, the effect control CPU 101 sets the advance notice effect execution flag indicating that the advance notice effect is being executed. Further, a value corresponding to the advance notice effect period corresponding to the advance notice effect is set in the advance notice effect period timer (S335).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads and sets the advance notice effect process table corresponding to the advance notice effect (notice effect A, advance notice effect B) to be executed (S336), and then the advance notice effect in the process data 1 of the selected process table. The process timer is started (S337). In the present embodiment, the advance notice effect process table corresponding to all combinations of each advance notice effect (notice effect A and advance notice effect B) is stored in the ROM in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 produces an effect according to the contents of the first process data 1 of the set advance notice effect process table (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1, etc.). Start controlling the devices (effect display device 9 as a production part, decorative LED 25 as a production part, frame LED 28, and speaker 27 as a production part, stick controller, first push button, second push button). (S338).

In addition, the effect control CPU 101 counts the number of times the first push button or the second push button is operated (the number of repeated hits) during the operation acceptance period of the first push button or the second push button during the execution of the advance notice effect. The value of the counter for the number of repeated hits, and the long press operation of the first push button and the second push button during the operation acceptance period of the first push button and the second push button during the execution of the notice effect are performed by the first push button and the first push button. 2 The value of the auto-repeated number counter for counting the number of times regarded as the operation of the push button (auto-repeated number of times), and the long-press operation of the first push button and the second push button are the first push button and the second push In order to measure the period considered to be the operation of the button, the value of the long-press determination timer and the value of the long-press determination timer are set to "0" respectively, and the advance notice effect processing is terminated (S339, S340, S341).

In the present embodiment, a counter for the number of repeated hits for counting the number of times the first push button and the second push button are operated (the number of repeated hits) and a long press operation of the first push button and the second push button are performed. An example has been exemplified in a form in which an auto continuous hit count counter for counting the number of times (auto continuous hit count) regarded as an operation of the first push button or the second push button is individually provided, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the number of automatic continuous hits may be added to the continuous hit count counter, and the automatic continuous hit count counter may not be provided.

Further, when the advance notice effect execution flag is set in S331, the process proceeds to S342, and the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the advance notice effect process timer for changing the process of the advance notice effect to -1. Then, the value of the advance notice effect period timer for timing the end of the advance notice effect period is set to -1 (S343). When the advance notice effect period timer goes out (the value becomes 0) (S344; Y), the advance notice effect execution flag is cleared and the advance notice effect process ends (S356).

When the advance notice effect period timer is not timer-out (S344; N), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the advance notice effect process timer has timed out (S345). If the advance notice effect process timer is out, the advance notice effect process data of the advance notice effect is switched (S346). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set value of the advance notice effect process timer in the advance notice effect process table in the process timer (S347). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data, etc. included in the advance notice effect process data set next. Is changed (S348a), and the process proceeds to S349.

When the advance notice effect process timer is not timer-out (S345; N), the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, and the sound control execution included in the advance notice effect process data corresponding to the running advance notice effect process timer are executed. The control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed (S348b) based on the data, the operation unit control execution data, and the like, and the process proceeds to S349.

In S349, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the operation promotion image display start timing. In the case of the promotion image display timing (S349; Y), the display of the image of the first push button as the operation promotion image on the effect display device 9 is started, and the display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits on the effect display device 9 is started. , Proceed to S352. If it is not the operation promotion image display start timing (S349; N), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to S352 without going through S350 and S351.

In S352, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the push button operation is being accepted based on the content of the advance notice effect process data being executed. If the push button operation is being accepted (S352; Y), the process proceeds to S361, and if the push button operation is not being accepted (S352; N), the process is further based on the content of the ongoing advance notice effect process data. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the image display effect (S353). In the case of the start timing of the image display effect (S353; Y), whether or not the sum of the value of the continuous hit count counter and the value of the auto continuous hit count counter has reached the execution count of the image display effect (the meter corresponding to the continuous hit is the final mode). Whether or not it has been updated to (full tank)) is determined (S354).

When the sum of the value of the continuous hit count counter and the value of the automatic repeated hit count counter reaches the number of times the image display effect is executed (S354; Y), the effect display device 9 starts displaying the image according to the effect type. The notice production process ends (S355).

If it is not the image display effect start timing (S353; N), or if the sum of the value of the continuous hit count counter and the value of the auto continuous hit count counter has not reached the number of times the image display effect is executed (S354; N), execute S355. The notice production process ends without any notice. In the present embodiment, if the continuous hitting compatible meter is in the final mode when the push button operation acceptance period ends, the effect display device 9 displays an image according to the effect type. The present invention is not limited to this, and even during the push button operation acceptance period, if the meter corresponding to repeated hits is in the final mode, the effect display device 9 can be used without waiting for the end of the push button operation acceptance period. An image corresponding to the production type may be displayed.

Then, in S361, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the first push button is operated. When there is an operation of the first push button (S361; Y), a button LED light emitting process (S362) for causing the first push button to emit light and a vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the first push button. The vibration motor drive process (S363) for driving (vibrating) the LED is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the first push button is operated regardless of whether it is long-pressed or repeatedly hit during the push button operation acceptance period, the first push button emits light and vibrates during the operation period. , When the operation of the first push button is interrupted, the light emission and vibration of the first push button are stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the push button operation acceptance period. , The light emitting mode and the vibration mode of the first push button may be different depending on whether or not the first push button is operated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the first push button is long-pressed is set (S364). If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S364; Y), the process proceeds to S368, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S364; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The value of the counter is incremented by +1 (S365), the flag for determining long press of the first push button is set, and the process proceeds to S368 (S366).

When it is determined in S361 that there is no operation of the first push button (S361; N), if the first push button long press determination flag is set, the first push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and proceed to S368 (S367).

In S368, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the second push button. When there is an operation of the second push button (S368; Y), it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the second push button is long-pressed is set. Judgment (S369). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S369; Y), the process proceeds to S373, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S369; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The value of the counter is incremented by +1 (S370), the second push button long press determination flag is set, and the process proceeds to S373 (S371).

When it is determined in S368 that there is no operation of the second push button (S368; N), if the second push button long press determination flag is set, the second push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and proceed to S373 (S372).

In S373, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. When both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S373; Y), the process proceeds to S391, and the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. When both the push button long press determination flag is not set, or only one of the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag is set (S373; N). ) Further determines whether or not the first push button long press determination flag is set (S374).

If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S374; Y), the process proceeds to S376, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S374; N), the process further proceeds. It is determined whether or not the second push button long press determination flag is set (S375). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S375; Y), the process proceeds to S382, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S375; N), a notice effect is produced. End the process.

In S376, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the long press determination timer by +1 based on the fact that the first push button long press determination flag is set (S374; Y) (S376), and the value of the long press determination timer. Determines whether or not the long press operation of the first push button has reached the auto-continuous hitting determination value which is regarded as the operation of the first push button (S377). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the auto-continuous hit determination value (S377; Y), the first push button auto-continuous hitting flag indicating that the first push button is being automatically hit is set (S378). Then, it is determined whether or not the flag for automatically repeatedly hitting the second push button, which indicates that the second push button is being repeatedly hit, is set (S379).

When the second push button auto-continuous hitting flag is set (S379; Y), that is, when the second push button auto-continuous hitting is already in progress and the first push button auto-continuous hitting is started. , The second push button auto-continuous hitting flag is cleared (S380), and the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is set to "0" to proceed to S393 (S381). If the second push button auto continuous hitting flag is not set (S379; N), the process proceeds to S393 without going through S380 and S381.

Further, in S382, the effect control CPU 101 adds +1 to the long press determination timer (S382) based on the fact that the second push button long press determination flag is set (S375; Y), and the long press determination timer It is determined whether or not the value of is an auto-continuous hitting determination value in which the long-pressing operation of the second push button is regarded as the operation of the second push button (S383). The long press determination timer (long press determination timer for determining the long press of the second push button) that increases +1 in S382 is the long press determination timer (to determine the long press of the first push button) that increases +1 in S376. The timer is the same as the long press determination timer), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the long press determination timer for determining the long press of the first push button and the long press of the second push button are long-pressed. The long-press determination timer for determining the above may be a different long-press determination timer.

When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the auto continuous hit determination value (S383; Y), the second push button auto continuous hitting flag indicating that the second push button is being automatically hit is set (S384). Then, it is determined whether or not the first push button auto-continuously hitting flag indicating that the first push-button is being automatically hit is set (S385).

When the first push button auto-continuous hitting flag is set (S385; Y), that is, when the first push button auto-continuous hitting is already in progress and the second push button auto-continuous hitting is started. , The first push button auto-continuous hitting flag is cleared (S386), and the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is set to "0" to proceed to S393 (S387). If the first push button auto continuous hitting flag is not set (S385; N), the process proceeds to S393 without executing S386 and S387.

If the value of the long press determination timer in S377 and S383 is not the automatic continuous hit determination value, the advance notice effect processing is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the long press of the first push button and the long press of the second push button are determined by using the long press determination timer, and the establishment of automatic continuous hitting is established by using the long press determination timer. An example of a mode in which the determination of automatic repeated hits is performed using the long press determination timer even after the determination is made, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the long press of the first push button and the second push button are performed. A different timer may be used between the timer for determining the long press of and the timer for determining the automatic continuous hit after determining the establishment of the automatic continuous hit based on the long press.

Further, in S391, the effect control CPU 101 sets the long press determination timer based on the fact that both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S373; Y). Whether the value is incremented by 1 and the value of the long press determination timer becomes an auto-continuous hit determination value in which the long press operation of the first push button and the second push button is regarded as the operation of the first push button and the second push button. Whether or not it is determined (S392). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the automatic continuous hit determination value (S392; Y), after the execution of any of S381 and S387, the value of the long press determination timer is set to "0" (S393). The value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is incremented by 1 (S394), and the process proceeds to S395. If the value of the long press determination timer is not the automatic continuous hit determination value (S392; N), the process proceeds to S395 without going through S393 and S394.

When the first push button auto-continuous hitting flag is set (S385; Y), that is, when the first push button auto-continuous hitting is already in progress and the second push button auto-continuous hitting is started. , The first push button auto-continuous hitting flag is cleared (S386), and the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is set to "0" to proceed to S393 (S387). If the first push button auto continuous hitting flag is not set (S385; N), the process proceeds to S393 without executing S386 and S387. Then, in S395, the effect control CPU 101 updates the display mode of the continuous stroke compatible meter according to the value of the sum of the continuous stroke count counter and the automatic continuous stroke count counter, and ends the advance notice effect process.

That is, in the advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button is started in the state where the value of the automatic repeated hitting count counter is added based on the automatic repeated hitting of the second push button, the first The value of the auto-continuous hit count counter added based on the auto-continuous hits of the two push buttons becomes invalid, and the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is added again based on the auto-continuous hits of the first push button.

Further, when the automatic repeated hitting of the second push button is started in the state where the value of the automatic repeated hitting counter is added based on the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button, the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button is performed. The added value of the automatic repeated hit count counter becomes invalid, and the value of the automatic repeated hit count counter is added again based on the automatic repeated hits of the second push button.

Furthermore, when the first push button and the second push button are held down at the same time, the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is the same as when one of the first push button and the second push button is held down. Addition is done. On the other hand, when the player repeatedly executes (continuously hits) both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, both the operation of the first push button and the operation of the second push button are repeated. Based on this, the value of the repeated hit count counter is added.

That is, in the advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the first push button and the second push button are held down at the same time, one of the first push button and the second push button is held down. When the number of meters corresponding to repeated hits increases at the same speed and the player repeatedly executes (continuously hits) both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, the player performs the first push button and the first push button. 2 The meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated faster than the case where one operation with the push button is repeatedly executed (continuous hits). When the player repeatedly executes both the first push button and the second push button, the speed at which the player repeatedly hits the first push button 31B and the speed at which the second push button is repeatedly hit are set. It depends. When both the operations of the first push button and the second push button are repeatedly executed (continuously hit), if the operations of the first push button and the second push button are detected during the same interruption. , The operation of the first push button and the second push button may be determined that the push button has been operated once or that the push button has not been operated.

24 to 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the process during the jackpot game according to the second embodiment. The jackpot game processing corresponds to, for example, the round processing (step S805) and the round post processing (step S806) shown in the first embodiment. In the process during the big hit game, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the designated command reception flag after opening the big winning opening is set, which indicates that the designated command has been received after opening the big winning opening (S411). When the designated command reception flag is set after the big winning opening is opened (S411; Y), whether or not the finished round is the final round, that is, the big hit type of the big hit game is "probability change A" or "non-probability change A". If it is "probability change", it is determined whether or not the designated command is a command indicating the 16th round after opening the big prize opening, and if the big hit type of the big hit game is "probability change B", the big winning opening is opened. It is determined whether or not the post-designated command is a command indicating the fifth round (S433).

When the finished round is the final round (S433; Y), the designated command reception flag is cleared after the big winning opening is opened (S434), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process. Ends the processing during the jackpot game. If the finished round is not the final round (S433; N), the process during the big hit game is finished without going through S434 and S435.

If the designated command reception flag is not set after the large winning opening is opened in S411 (S411; N), the designated command receiving flag during opening of the large winning opening is set to indicate that the designated command during opening of the large winning opening is received. It is determined whether or not the command is performed (S412). If the designated command reception flag during opening of the large winning opening is not set (S412; N), the process proceeds to S422, and if the designated command receiving flag during opening of the large winning opening is set (S412; Y), the notification effect is produced. It is determined whether or not it is the execution round of (S413). In the present embodiment, the execution round of the notification effect is the sixth round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the round for executing the notification effect is any round out of 1 to 16. It may be decided by lottery for each big hit game.

If it is not the execution round of the notification effect (S413; N), the process table for the round effect is set according to the round (S414), and the process timer for the round exercise is started to end the process during the big hit game (S415). .. Further, in the case of the execution round of the notification effect (S413; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a decision to execute the probability variation notification effect (S416).

When there is a decision to execute the probability change notification effect (S416; Y), that is, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "probability change A", the process table for the probability change notification effect is set as the round effect and the process proceeds to S419 (S419). S417). Further, when there is no decision to execute the probability change notification effect (S416; N), that is, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is "non-probability", a process table for the non-probability notification effect as a round effect is set. Proceed to S419 (S418).

In S419, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the continuous hit count counter, the value of the automatic continuous hit count counter, and the value of the long press determination timer to "0", respectively, and ends the process during the big hit game (S419, S420, S421).

Further, in S422, the effect control CPU 101 sets the round effect process timer to -1 based on the fact that the designated command reception flag during the opening of the large winning opening is not set (S412; N). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the round effect process timer has timed out (S423). If the round effect process timer is out of timer (S423; Y), the round effect process data is switched (S424). That is, the process timer for round effect is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table for round effect to the process timer for round effect (S425). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (S426a). On the other hand, when the round effect process timer is not timer-out (S423; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the round effect process timer (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation). Control of the effect device (effect component) is executed according to (part control data, etc.) (S426b).

After the execution of S426a or S426b, the effect control CPU 101 displays the image of the first push button and a message prompting the player to operate (continuously hit) the first push button a plurality of times (for example, "continuous hit!"). It is determined whether or not it is the display start timing of the operation promotion image including and (S427). When it is the display start timing of the operation promotion image (S427; Y), the image of the first push button and a message prompting the player to operate the first push button a plurality of times (continuous hits) (for example, "continuous hits"). The display of the operation promotion image including "!" Etc. and the display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits are started in the effect display device 9, and the process proceeds to S430 (S428, S429). If it is not the display start timing of the operation promotion image (S427; N), the process proceeds to S430 without executing S428 and S429.

In S430, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the operation of the push buttons (first push button and second push button) is being accepted. When it is not during the push button operation acceptance period (S430; N), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the image display effect (S431). When it is the start timing of the image display effect (S431; Y), the effect display device 9 starts displaying an image (probability change notification image or non-probability change notification image) according to the effect type of the image display effect, and the jackpot game is in progress. When the process is completed (S432) and it is not the start timing of the image display effect (S431; N), the effect during the jackpot game is ended without going through S432.

In the present embodiment, an example of displaying an image according to the effect type on the effect display device 9 when the operation acceptance period of the push button ends is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, even during the push button operation acceptance period, if the meter corresponding to repeated hits is in the final mode, an image corresponding to the effect type is displayed on the effect display device 9 without waiting for the end of the push button operation acceptance period. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the first push button and the second push button is accepted in the sixth round during the big hit game, and the image (probability change notification image or non-probability change notification image) according to the production type is displayed. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reception of the operation of the first push button and the second push button and the display of the image according to the effect type are respectively. It may be performed in different rounds.

When the push button operation is being accepted in S430 (S430; Y), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the first push button is operated (S441). When there is an operation of the first push button (S441; Y), a button LED light emitting process (S442) for causing the first push button to emit light and a vibration motor for driving the first push button (vibration) are performed. The vibration motor drive process (S443) to be caused is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the first push button is operated regardless of whether it is long-pressed or repeatedly hit during the push button operation acceptance period, the first push button emits light and vibrates during the operation period. , When the operation of the first push button is interrupted, the light emission and vibration of the first push button are stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the push button operation acceptance period. , The light emitting mode and the vibration mode of the first push button may be different depending on whether or not the first push button is operated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the first push button is long-pressed is set (S444). If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S444; Y), the process proceeds to S448, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S444; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The value of the counter is incremented by +1 (S445), the flag for determining long press of the first push button is set, and the process proceeds to S448 (S446).

In S448, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the second push button. When there is an operation of the second push button (S448; Y), a button LED light emitting process (S442) for causing the first push button to emit light and a vibration motor for driving the first push button (vibration) are performed. The vibration motor drive process (S443) to be caused is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the first push button is long-pressed is set (S444). If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S444; Y), the process proceeds to S448, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S444; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The value of the counter is incremented by +1 (S445), the flag for determining long press of the first push button is set, and the process proceeds to S448 (S446).

When it is determined in S441 that there is no operation of the first push button (S441; N), if the first push button long press determination flag is set, the first push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and proceed to S448 (S447).

In S448, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an operation of the second push button. When there is an operation of the second push button (S448; Y), it is determined whether or not the flag for determining whether or not the second push button is long-pressed is set. Judgment (S449). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S449; Y), the process proceeds to S453, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S449; N), the number of repeated hits is set. The counter value is incremented by +1 (S450), the second push button long press determination flag is set, and the process proceeds to S453 (S451).

When it is determined in S448 that there is no operation of the second push button (S448; N), if the second push button long press determination flag is set, the second push button long press determination flag is set. Clear and proceed to S453 (S452).

In S453, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. When both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S453; Y), the process proceeds to S461, and the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set. When both the push button long press determination flag is not set, or only one of the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag is set (S453; N). ) Further determines whether or not the first push button long press determination flag is set (S454).

If the first push button long press determination flag is set (S454; Y), the process proceeds to S456, and if the first push button long press determination flag is not set (S454; N), the process further proceeds. It is determined whether or not the second push button long press determination flag is set (S455). If the second push button long press determination flag is set (S455; Y), the process proceeds to S456, and if the second push button long press determination flag is not set (S455; N), the jackpot game End the middle production process.

In S456, the effect control CPU 101 has the first push button long press determination flag set (S454; Y) or the second push button long press determination flag set (S455; Y). Based on the above, the long-press determination timer is incremented by 1 (S456), and it is determined whether or not the value of the long-press determination timer has reached the auto-continuous hit determination value (S457). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the auto continuous hit determination value (S457; Y), the process proceeds to S463. If the value of the long press determination timer is not the automatic continuous hit determination value (S457; N), the jackpot middle effect processing is terminated.

Further, in S461, the effect control CPU 101 sets the long press determination timer based on the fact that both the first push button long press determination flag and the second push button long press determination flag are set (S453; Y). Whether the value is incremented by 1 and the value of the long press determination timer becomes an auto-continuous hit determination value in which the long press operation of the first push button and the second push button is regarded as the operation of the first push button and the second push button. It is determined whether or not (S462). When the value of the long press determination timer becomes the auto continuous hit determination value in S457 or S462 (S462 or S457; Y), the value of the long press determination timer is set to "0" (S463), and the auto continuous hit count counter. The value of is incremented by +1 (S464), and the process proceeds to S465. If the value of the long press determination timer in S462 is not the automatic continuous hit determination value (S392; N), the process proceeds to S465 without going through S463 and S464. The long press determination timer (long press determination timer for determining that both the first push button and the second push button are long pressed) in S461 is a long press determination timer (+1 in S456). It is the same timer as the long press determination timer for determining the long press of only one of the first push button and the 21st push button 32), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first push button is not limited to this. A long-press determination timer for determining that both the first push button and the second push button are long-pressed, and a long-press determination timer for determining that only one of the first push button and the 21st push button 32 is long-pressed. May be different long-press determination timers.

Then, in S465, the effect control CPU 101 updates the display mode of the continuous stroke corresponding meter according to the value of the sum of the continuous stroke count counter and the automatic continuous stroke count counter, and ends the advance notice effect process.

That is, in the notification effect of the present embodiment, when the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button is started in the state where the value of the automatic repeated hitting count counter is added based on the automatic repeated hitting of the second push button, the first The value of the auto-continuous hit count counter added based on the auto-continuous hit of the two push buttons is inherited by the auto-continuous hit of the first push button.

Further, when the automatic repeated hitting of the second push button is started in the state where the value of the automatic repeated hitting counter is added based on the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button, the automatic repeated hitting of the first push button is performed. The added value of the automatic repeated hit count counter is inherited by the automatic repeated hit of the second push button.

Furthermore, when the first push button and the second push button are held down at the same time, the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter is the same as when one of the first push button and the second push button is held down. Addition is done. On the other hand, when the player repeatedly executes (continuously hits) both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, both the operation of the first push button and the operation of the second push button are repeated. Based on this, the value of the repeated hit count counter is added.

That is, in the notification effect of the present embodiment, when the first push button and the second push button are held down at the same time, one of the first push button and the second push button is held down. When the number of meters corresponding to repeated hits increases at the same speed and the player repeatedly executes (continuously hits) both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, the player performs the first push button and the first push button. 2 The meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated faster than the case where one operation with the push button is repeatedly executed (continuous hits). When the player repeatedly executes both the operations of the first push button and the second push button, it depends on the speed at which the player repeatedly hits the first push button 31B and the speed at which the second push button is repeatedly hit. Is different.

As described above, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 (A), 28 (B), 31 (A), and 31 (B), the player pushes. If only one of the first push button and the second push button is repeatedly hit during the button operation acceptance period, the display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated for each operation of the first push button and the second push button. Eventually, the meter for repeated hits becomes full (final mode). Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A), 28 (C), and 31 (C), when the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation acceptance period. Is to update the display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits for each operation of the first push button and the second push button, so that the player can use the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation acceptance period. The meter for repeated hits fills up (final mode) faster than when only one is hit repeatedly.

In the notice effect and the notification effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 29 (A), 29 (B), 32 (A), and 32 (B), the player accepts the push button operation. When only one of the 1st push button and the 2nd push button is pressed and held inside, the 1st push button and the 2nd push are made when the automatic repeated hits are established based on the long pressing of the 1st push button and the 2nd push button. The display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is gradually updated on condition that the long press of the button is continued, and a predetermined period (for example,) after the player starts pressing and holding the first push button or the second push button. Based on the elapse of the long push period L1) shown in FIGS. 29 (A), 29 (B), 32 (A), and 32 (B), the meter for repeated hits is finally full (final mode). Become.

Further, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A), 30 (A), and 33 (A), the player first receives the push button operation during the operation acceptance period. When both the push button and the second push button are pressed and held, the player automatically presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation acceptance period. The display of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is gradually updated on the condition that the continuous hits are established and both the first push button and the second push button are continuously pressed, and the player becomes the first push button. Based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, the long press period L1 shown in FIGS. 30 (A) and 33 (A)) after the start of both long presses with the second push button, the meter finally supports repeated hits. Is full (final mode). That is, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect of the present embodiment, when the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button during the push button operation acceptance period, the player presses the push button. It is considered that one of the first push button and the second push button was pressed and held during the operation acceptance period of the player, and the player pressed the first push button and the second push button during the operation acceptance period of the push button. The determination of automatic repeated hits is executed at the same speed as when one of the push buttons is pressed and held, and the player presses either the first push button or the second push button for a long time during the push button operation acceptance period. The meter for repeated hits is updated to full (final mode) at the same speed as when pushing.

In the advance notice effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when one of the first push button and the second push button is long-pressed and then the other long-press is executed (FIG. 30 (B). ) Indicates a form in which the second push button is long-pressed after the first push button is long-pressed.) If one long-press is switched to the other long-press before the auto-continuous hit is established, the long-press auto-continuous hit is performed. The judgment is to be redone. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 30 (B), after executing the automatic continuous hitting corresponding to the long pressing of either the first push button or the second push button, the other long pressing is performed. When switching to the execution of automatic repeated hits, the value of the automatic repeated hits counter is reset to "0" when the push button to be long-pressed is switched, so either the first push button or the second push button The number of automatic repeated hits during the period during which one was held down (long press period L2 shown in FIG. 30 (B); L1> L2) and the period during which the other was held down (long press period shown in FIG. 30 (B)). Even if the total of the number of automatic repeated hits in L3; L1> L3) reaches the number of automatic repeated hits in the predetermined period (long press period L1), the continuous hit compatible meter is not updated to full (final mode).

However, in the notification effect of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when one of the first push button and the second push button is held down and then the other is held down (FIG. 33). (B) exemplifies a form in which the second push button is long-pressed after the first push button is long-pressed). If one long-press is switched to the other long-press before the automatic continuous hit is established, the long-press auto is performed. It is possible to take over the judgment of repeated hits. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A) and 33 (B), after executing the automatic continuous hitting corresponding to the long pressing of either the first push button or the second push button, the other long pressing is performed. When switching to the execution of automatic repeated hits, the value of the automatic repeated hits counter is not reset to "0" even if the push button to be long-pressed is switched, so either the first push button or the second push button is used. The number of automatic repeated hits during the period during which the button was held down (long press period L2 shown in FIG. 30B) and the number of automatic repeated hits during the period during which the other was held down (long press period L3 shown in FIG. 30B). When the sum of and has reached the number of automatic continuous hits in the predetermined period (long press period L1), the continuous hit compatible meter is updated to full (final mode).

Assuming that the meter corresponding to repeated hits in the notification effect is a meter that is updated to full tank (final mode) by repeated hits of the first push button and the second push button a specific number of times (for example, 20 times) or automatic repeated hits for a specific number of times. Since the first repeated hits are counted at the timing when the long press of the 1 push button or the 2nd push button is started, long press one of the 1st push button and the 2nd push button for the long press period L2. If the other is pressed and held for the long press period L3, then only one of the first push button and the second push button is pressed and held for the long press period L1 at a timing one auto-repeated hit earlier. The meter for repeated hits is updated to full (final mode).

Focusing on the case where the first push button is operated by the player and the case where the second push button is operated during each production, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the first push button is operated by the player. When is operated, since the first push button has a button LED (not shown) and a vibration motor (not shown) built-in, the button LED emits light and the first push button vibrates by driving the vibration motor. On the other hand, when the second push button is operated by the player, the second push button does not emit light or vibrate because the member corresponding to the button LED and the vibration motor is not built in. That is, when the vibration motor is vibrating by its own drive, the player can strongly sense the vibration of the vibration motor by operating the first push button, while the vibration of the vibration motor causes the game frame. Since a part of the vibration is transmitted to the second push button, the player can perceive the vibration of the vibration motor by operating the second push button weaker than when operating the first push button.

However, since the same determination value (automatic continuous hit determination value) is used when the first push button is long-pressed by the player and when the second push button is long-pressed, the player makes the first push. The interval at which automatic repeated hits are established (long press determination interval) is the same (for example, 0.2 seconds shown in FIG. 27 (B)) when the button is pressed and held and when the second push button is pressed and held. It has become.

That is, as described above, in the advance notice effect, after the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, the long press determination interval When the second push button is pressed and held for a short second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the total of the first period and the second period has reached the long press determination interval. The automatic continuous hitting is not executed, and the display mode of the continuous hitting compatible meter is not updated.

On the other hand, in the notification effect, the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, and then the second push button is shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for a period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the automatic repeated hits are performed based on the fact that the total of the first period and the second period has reached the long press determination interval. It is executed and the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), a mode in which the long press determination can be taken over is illustrated in the notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the notification effect, the takeover of the long press determination may be invalidated as in the advance notice effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the first period in the present invention is 0.15 seconds and the second period is 0.05 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period may be of the same length.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect, the player can repeatedly hit the button by pressing and holding both the first push button and the second push button. The display mode of the meter is updated, and the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by the automatic continuous hitting based on the player pressing and holding only one of the first push button and the second push button. As shown in FIGS. 22, 23, 25 and 26, for each interruption regardless of whether both the first push button and the second push button are held down or only one of them is held down. Since the value of the auto-continuous hit count counter always adds only 1, the case where the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button. The update speed of the meter for repeated hits is the same as when pressing and holding only.

On the other hand, there is a case where the player updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by repeatedly hitting both the first push button and the second push button, and a case where the player updates either the first push button or the second push button. In the case of updating the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by repeatedly hitting only, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 25, the operation of the first push button and the operation of the second push button are always performed for each interruption. Since the value of the repeated hit count counter is added by 1 for each, only one of the case where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player repeatedly hits the first push button and the second push button. The meter corresponding to repeated hits can be updated faster when the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button. As described above, in the present embodiment, the update speed of the continuous hit compatible meter is made different depending on whether the player's operation detected by the first push button and the second push button is a continuous hit or a long press. It is possible to improve the effect of the advance notice effect and the notification effect.

In the present embodiment, the case where the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button. The present invention is not limited to this, and the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button, although the embodiment in which the update speeds of the meters corresponding to repeated hits are the same is illustrated. The update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits may be different depending on whether the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button and cases where the player repeatedly hits only one of the first push button and the second push button. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the case where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button, and the game. The update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits may be the same in the case where the person repeatedly hits only one of the first push button and the second push button.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the player presses and holds both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button. Then, the update "speed" of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is made the same, and the case where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button and the case where the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button An example is shown in which the update "speed" of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is different depending on the case where only one is hit repeatedly, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player pushes the first push button and the second push. When both the buttons are pressed and held, and when the player presses and holds only one of the first push button and the second push button, an image (image A or image B in the advance notice effect) is displayed on the effect display device 9. The "speed" until the probability change notification image and the non-probability change notification image in the notification effect are displayed is the same, and the player repeatedly hits both the first push button and the second push button, and the player is the first. When only one of the 1 push button and the 2nd push button is repeatedly pressed, an image (image A and image B in the advance notice effect, a probability change notification image and a non-probability change notification image in the notification effect) is displayed on the effect display device 9. The "speed" up to the point may be different. That is, the "quickness" in the present invention includes the "speed (update speed)" in which the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by the operation of the first push button and the second push button, as well as the first push button and the second push button. Includes "speed (period until image display)" until an image (image A or image B in the advance notice effect, probabilistic notification image or non-probability change notification image in the notification effect) is displayed on the effect display device 9 by the operation of. It has been.

Further, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect, when the player presses and holds only the first push button and when only the second push button is pressed and held, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), automatic continuous hitting is established. Since the interval (long press judgment interval) is the same as 0.2 seconds, the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by the automatic repeated hits based on the player pressing and holding only the first push button. , When the player updates the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by auto-continuous hitting based on pressing and holding only the second push button, the update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is the same, so that the advance notice effect and the notification effect are produced. Can be easily understood by the player, and the effect of the advance notice effect and the notification effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which the update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is the same when the player presses and holds only the first push button and when only the second push button is pressed and held. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update speed of the meter corresponding to repeated hits differs depending on whether the player presses and holds only the first push button and the second push button. You may do so.

Further, in the advance notice effect, the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, and then a second period shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for (for example, 0.05 seconds), automatic continuous hitting is executed even though the total of the first period and the second period has reached the long press determination interval. Since the display mode of the meter for repeated hits is not updated, it can be easily understood that the update of the display mode of the meter for continuous hits is not started by changing the push button that the player presses and holds. The effect of the production can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, in the advance notice effect, the long press determination interval is performed after the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for a shorter second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the long press of the second push button does not take over the long press period of the first push button. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period shorter than the long press determination interval in the advance notice effect. When the second push button is long-pressed for a second period shorter than the determination interval, the long-pressing period of the first push button may be taken over by the long-pressing of the second push button.

In addition, in the notification effect, the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval, and then a second period shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for (for example, 0.05 seconds), automatic continuous hitting is executed according to the total of the first period and the second period reaching the long press determination interval. Since the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated, the effect of the notification effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, in the notification effect, the long press determination interval is performed after the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period (for example, 0.15 seconds) shorter than the long press determination interval. When the second push button is pressed and held for a shorter second period (for example, 0.05 seconds), the long press of the second push button takes over the long press period of the first push button. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the long press determination is made after the player presses and holds the first push button for a first period shorter than the long press determination interval in the notification effect. When the second push button is long-pressed for a second period shorter than the interval, the long-pressing period of the first push button may not be inherited by the long-pressing of the second push button.

Further, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect of the present embodiment, the image of the first push button and the first push as the operation promotion image on the effect display device 9 during the operation acceptance period of the first push button and the second push button. By displaying a message prompting the operation (continuous hitting) of the button, the player can be prompted to operate the first push button, and the effect of the advance notice effect and the notification effect can be enhanced.

Further, the first push button of the present embodiment has a built-in vibration motor, and when the first push button is operated in the advance notice effect or the notification effect, the first push is driven (vibration) of the vibration motor. While the button vibrates, the vibration motor does not drive (vibrate) when the second push button is operated in the advance notice effect or the notification effect, so that the second push button does not vibrate, that is, the first push. Since the strength of the vibration differs between the button and the second push button, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect and the notification effect.

In this embodiment, the first push button vibrates by the drive (vibration) of the built-in vibration motor, and the second push button does not vibrate, as "the strength of vibration is different". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the vibration motor is driven (vibrated) in response to the operation of the second push button, and the vibration generated by the vibration motor is transmitted to the second push button. The push button may vibrate weaker than the first push button.

Further, in the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the vibration motor is built in the first push button and the vibration motor is not built in the second push button is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second push button is not limited to this. While the push button has a built-in vibration motor, the first push button does not have a built-in vibration motor. When the second push button is operated by the player, when the first push button is operated by the player. The second push button may vibrate more strongly than the second push button.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the vibration motor is built in the first push button and the vibration motor is not built in the second push button is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first A vibration motor may be built in both the push button and the second push button. When the vibration motor is built in both the first push button and the second push button in this way, the performance of the vibration motor built in the first push button and the vibration motor built in the second push button is performed. The strength of the vibration of the first push button and the second push button may be different by making them different.

In the present embodiment, in the advance notice effect and the notification effect, the player presses and holds the first push button and the length of the second push button during the operation acceptance period of the first push button and the second push button. An example is illustrated in which the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is updated by automatic repeated hits in response to pressing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation acceptance period of the first push button or the second push button is used. Even if there is, if the operation of the first push button or the operation of the second push button by the player is detected after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the operation acceptance period, the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits by automatic repeated hits. May not be updated until the final mode, so that the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits may not be updated. By doing so, even during the operation acceptance period of the first push button and the second push button, the display mode of the meter corresponding to repeated hits is the final mode by the automatic repeated hits by long pressing the first push button and the second push button. Since it is possible to provide a case where the game is updated and a case where the game is not updated, the game entertainment can be improved. If the operation of the first push button or the operation of the second push button by the player is detected from the start of the operation acceptance period to the elapse of a predetermined period, the meter corresponding to repeated hits is performed by automatic repeated hits as in the present embodiment. The display mode of is updated to the final mode.

Further, in the present invention, as an example of "the first effect of the first detection means has a stronger effect intensity than the first effect of the second detection means", the "image of the first push button" illustrated in the present embodiment is used. In addition to the form of "displaying but not displaying the image of the second push button", the form of "displaying the image of the second push button smaller than the image of the first push button" is included. Similarly, as an example of "the second effect related to the first detection means has a stronger effect intensity than the second effect related to the second detection means", the "message prompting the operation of the first push button" illustrated in the present embodiment is used. In addition to the form of "displaying but not displaying the message prompting the operation of the second push button", the form of "displaying the message prompting the operation of the second push button smaller than the message prompting the first push button" Includes. Further, the effect intensity in the present invention includes the size and presence / absence of the image displayed on the effect display device 9, the volume / presence / absence of the sound output from the speaker 27, the amount of light output from the decorative LED 25 and the frame LED 28. Including the strength and presence / absence of.

When the configuration shown in the present embodiment is applied to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, for example, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time during the automatic continuous striking. In addition, according to the same process as in the first embodiment, the brightness or the volume may be adjusted with priority given to either the brightness or the volume. Further, for example, when both the brightness adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are performed at the same time immediately after the stick controller, the first push button, and the second push button are operated, any of the operating means can be operated. The brightness or the volume may be adjusted by giving priority to either the brightness or the volume depending on whether the brightness or the volume has just been performed. In this case, for example, immediately after the stick controller is tilted, the brightness adjustment is prioritized, or immediately after the first push button or the second push button is pressed. For example, the volume adjustment may be prioritized.

It is also possible to configure the game machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first embodiment to the second embodiment shown above.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 uses another substrate (for example, the figure). For the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc. shown in 2, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the voice output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 100 that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control and lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. You may send it to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above embodiments, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to relationships such as A: B = 70%: 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratios are different (that is, one is 100% allocated and the other is 0%).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" and a plurality of types of ordinary symbols of "○" and "×" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. However, the variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the game machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and a game medium such as a game ball is enclosed and a score is given when the condition for giving the prize is satisfied. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination that the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a game machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in a special variable winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (for example, an upward pressing operation unit 130a of the cross key 130 and a lower part). The volume is based on the direction operation unit 130b), the brightness adjustment operation means for adjusting the brightness (for example, the left direction pressing operation unit 130c and the right direction operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and the volume adjustment operation means. The adjustment means includes an adjustment means (for example, a portion for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a process of performing adjustment and a process of performing brightness adjustment based on an operation on the brightness adjustment operation means. When the volume lowering operation by the volume adjusting operation means and the brightness increasing operation by the brightness adjusting operation means are performed, the volume lowering process is preferentially executed (for example, step S4009 in the effect control microcomputer 100). , S4010. Refer to the process of timing T1 shown in FIG. 20. Further, a specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the mode of the effect (for example, a specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). A period for maintaining the first aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the vertical direction) and a period for maintaining the second aspect (secondary) as specific effects, provided with an effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of performing the effect. It is possible to perform an effect different from the period in which the image display device 9051 is maintained sideways), and the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state favorable to the player differs depending on the length of the period in which the second aspect is maintained. (For example, when the specific effect is executed, the longer the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways, the higher the expectation of a big hit, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the operation of lowering the volume and the operation of increasing the brightness are performed, the process of lowering the volume is preferentially executed, and the process of adjusting either the volume or the brightness is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

Alternatively, the gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a volume adjusting operation means for adjusting the volume (for example, the upward pressing operation unit 130a of the cross key 130). And downward operation unit 130b), brightness adjustment operation means for performing brightness adjustment (for example, left direction pressing operation unit 130c and right direction operation unit 130d of the cross key 130), and volume adjustment operation means. It is provided with an adjusting means (for example, a portion for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a process of adjusting the volume and a process of adjusting the brightness based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operating means. When the operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operation means and the operation of raising the volume by the volume adjusting operation means are performed, the means preferentially executes the process of lowering the brightness (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100). A portion for executing steps S4011 and S4012. Refer to the process of timing T2 shown in FIG. 20. Further, the orientation of the specific effect means (for example, the sub-image display device 9051) capable of executing the specific effect for maintaining the mode of the effect is maintained. A period for maintaining the first aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the vertical direction) and a period for maintaining the second aspect as the specific effect, provided with an effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing the specific effect. It is possible to perform an effect different from (the period during which the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways), and the degree of expectation is controlled to an advantageous state favorable to the player according to the length of the period during which the second aspect is maintained. (For example, when a specific effect is executed, the longer the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways, the higher the expectation of a big hit, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the operation of increasing the volume and the operation of decreasing the brightness are performed, the process of lowering the brightness is preferentially executed, and the process of adjusting either the volume or the brightness is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

An operating means for adjusting the volume and brightness (for example, the cross key 130) and an operating means operated by the player for executing the effect executed when the player operates (for example, a stick controller). The 9031A and the push button 9031B) may be configured by a separate operating means, or may be configured by a common operating means. If it is configured by a separate operation means, even if the player wants to adjust the volume or the brightness during the period in which the promotion display prompting the player's operation is performed (that is, the operation valid period), it can be suitably handled. .. Further, if it is configured by a common operating means, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where it is configured by a separate operating means, and it becomes easy to reduce the cost. In addition, when it is configured by a common operation means, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment cannot be performed during the period when the promotion display for prompting the player's operation is performed (that is, the operation valid period). It is desirable to prevent erroneous operations (volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, etc. are performed against the player's will). Further, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may not be performed during the period in which the specific effect (for example, the effect of maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051) is being executed. By doing so, the player does not try to adjust the volume or brightness during the period during which the mode of production is maintained, and the player concentrates on the game. Therefore, the period during which the mode of production is maintained. Can be paid more attention to.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered and also pay attention to the period during which the aspect of the effect is maintained, the control is performed in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can execute a specific effect that maintains the mode of the effect (for example, a specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). A period for maintaining the first aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the vertical direction) and a period for maintaining the second aspect (sub-image display device) as the specific effect. It is possible to execute an effect different from the period in which the 9051 is maintained sideways), and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the length of the period in which the second aspect is maintained (for example, the specific effect is executed). The longer the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways, the higher the expectation of a big hit, etc.). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly classified into a gaming board 902 that constitutes the game board surface and a gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, and is a plurality of types of special symbol games that can be identified as an example of a variable display game. The special symbol, which is the special identification information of, is displayed in a variable manner. For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. To do. Then, at the end of the variable display, the variable display result is derived and displayed by stopping and displaying the fixed special symbol as the variable display result.

The variable display result and the variable display special symbol that are derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B indicate a number indicating "0" to "9" or "-". It is not limited to those composed of symbols and the like. For example, in the 7-segment LED, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols. The lighting pattern of the variable display may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off as appropriate.

In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is referred to as the "second special symbol". Also called. Further, the special figure game of the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game of the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images. On the screen of the image display device 905, identification information different from the special symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, corresponding to the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The decorative design is variably displayed.

As an example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. Then, corresponding to the start of either the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, At 905R, the change of the decorative pattern is started. After that, when the variable display result in the special figure game is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 905. The fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is stopped and displayed.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 905, each can be identified in synchronization with the first special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 904B. The variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is performed, and the variable display result is derived and displayed at the end of the variable display.

In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to stop and display the identification information such as the decorative symbol and end the variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking, expansion and contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

A display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. In the display area 905H, a display is performed so that the number of special figure games whose execution is suspended can be specified. The special figure game whose execution is suspended is a special figure game that has not been started yet, and is stored as a hold memory. In this embodiment, by storing the information for executing the special figure game, the special figure game corresponding to the information is stored as the hold storage. Therefore, the number of reserved special figures games is also referred to as the number of reserved special figures. Further, the display in which the number of reserved special figure games displayed in the display area 905H can be specified is also referred to as a reserved storage display.

The holding of the special figure game is, for example, a start winning prize due to a game ball entering the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A or the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. Occurs based on. That is, although the start condition for executing the special figure game is satisfied, the special figure game based on the previously established start condition is being executed, the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the like. Therefore, when the start condition that allows the start of the special figure game is not satisfied, the special figure game corresponding to the established start condition is put on hold.

For example, when the start condition of the first special figure game is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start condition for starting the first special figure game based on the establishment of the first start condition is satisfied. If not, the number of stored first special figures is added by 1, and the execution of the first special figure game is suspended. In addition, when the start condition of the second special figure game is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start condition for starting the second special figure game based on the establishment of the second start condition is satisfied. If not, the number of the second special figure reserved memory is added by 1, and the execution of the second special figure game is suspended. When the execution of the first special figure game is started, the first special figure reserved storage number is subtracted by 1, and when the execution of the second special figure game is started, the second special figure reserved storage number is subtracted by 1. Will be done.

The variable display special figure hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also particularly referred to as a total hold memory number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, it refers to a part of these. It shall be possible.

In this embodiment, the hold storage display is performed by displaying the same number of symbol images as the reserved special figure game. One hold display image corresponds to one hold special figure game and shows the hold special figure game. The hold display image corresponding to the first special figure game is displayed in the area 905HA on the left side of the display area 905H. A plurality of display positions of the first hold display image are set in the area 905HA, and the first hold display image is displayed left-justified in order from the leftmost display position. The hold display image corresponding to the second special figure game is displayed in the area 905HB on the right side of the display area 905H. A plurality of display positions of the second hold display image are set in the area 905HB, and the second hold display image is displayed left-justified in order from the leftmost display position.

When the first special figure game is executed, the leftmost first hold display image is deleted. At this time, if there are other first hold display images, each of the other first hold display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left. When the second special figure game is executed, the leftmost second hold display image is deleted. At this time, if there are other second hold display images, each of the other second hold display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left.

A display device for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the display area 905H or in place of the display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 34, along with the display area 905H, the first hold indicator 9025A for identifiablely displaying the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. And a second hold display device 9025B are provided. The first hold display 9025A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B are configured to include, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively. .. Here, the number of stored first special figures and the number of stored second special figures are displayed according to the number of LEDs lit.

A sub-image display device 9051 is provided on the right side of the image display device 905. Similar to the image display device 905, the sub-image display device 9051 is composed of an LCD or the like and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the sub-image display device 9051, an image related to the image displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed, and the effect operation in which the display image on the image display device 905 and the display image on the sub-image display device 9051 are linked. Is done. Further, the sub-image display device 9051 is configured so that the front side of the image display device 905 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by, for example, the drive motor 9052 shown in FIG. 35.

On the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, a small symbol display area 9051V smaller than the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R is provided. On the screen of the sub-image display device 9051 shown in FIG. 34, a small symbol display area 9051V is provided in the lower portion. In the small symbol display area 9051V, the variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small pattern is also called a broadcast information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 9051V provided on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, the effect image showing the small symbol to be the broadcast information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol to be the display result is displayed. Is derived.

In this way, on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, a variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that is the display result, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously performed in a certain display mode, and disappears from the screen or is a shield. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 9051V is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9051V. The small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 9051V is also referred to as a constant small symbol or a small symbol for production. In the small symbol display area 9051V, a plurality of types that can be identified by a display mode in which some or all of the plurality of types of decorative symbols are common to each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols, such as a symbol that indicates numbers as well as a part that indicates numbers in the decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small symbol of the above may be variably displayed as the broadcast information image.

A fourth symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and the normal symbol, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed in a specific display color at regular time intervals, for example, in the fourth symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 905 or the screen of the sub-image display device 9051. It is realized by continuing the display control that repeats hiding. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 905, for example, on the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. 34. Has been done. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051 to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, which makes it special. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display of the symbol is in progress and whether or not the display result is derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9051V provided on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051 and deriving the display result, whether or not the variable display is in progress is determined. Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B includes an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory. 2 Form a starting winning opening.

The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening because, for example, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. Become. On the other hand, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is open so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is on. Become in a state. The normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normally open state when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, and is expanded and opened so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening when the solenoid 9081 is in the on state than in the normally open state. It may be configured to be in a state. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B may be changed to, for example, a first variable state and a second variable state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than the first variable state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of stored first special figures is less than the predetermined upper limit value, the first start is performed. The condition is met. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the number of the second special figure reserved memory is less than the predetermined upper limit value, the second start is performed. The condition is met.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door, and the large winning opening door changes between an open state and a closed state. Form the mouth.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening. .. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. To do. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the big winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball enters the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the game ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball, and the game is played more than in the first state. It becomes a second state that is disadvantageous to the person.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 902. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, a plurality of types different from the special symbol are used. The normal symbol, which is the identification information, is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result is derived and displayed at the end of the variable display. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is called a normal symbol game. Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041 formed in the game area.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. A plate is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided to hold the surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

A stick controller 9031A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and has a trigger button at a predetermined position of the operation stick. The trigger button may be configured so that a player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger while the operating rod of the stick controller 9031A is grasped by the operating hand. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

A controller sensor unit 9035A including a tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilting direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photo sensors arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 901. It is configured to include four transmissive photosensors that combine two transmissive photosensors arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. Just do it. The controller sensor unit 9035A outputs a signal corresponding to the operation to the stick controller 9031A to the effect control board 9012 of FIG. 35.

The member forming the upper plate is provided with a push button 9031B, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body, which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. The push button 9031B may be configured so as to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. Inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B, a push sensor 9035B that mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the operation action of the player performed on the push button 9031B is provided. You just have to. The push sensor 9035B outputs a signal corresponding to the operation to the push button 9031B to the effect control board 9012 of FIG. 35.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 35. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 or the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back surface of the game board or the like in the pachinko game machine 901. ..

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 mainly sends a command to a control board on the sub side including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of receiving a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls the lighting / extinguishing of the LEDs and the like constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. It also has a function of controlling the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the normal game by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. Further, the main board 9011 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, the normal figure hold indicator 9025C, and the like to display various hold storage numbers.

For example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9082 for the winning door.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives an image display device 905, speakers 908L, and 908R. , Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 has a function of performing a display operation on the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a lighting / extinguishing operation on the game effect lamp 909, that is, an electric component for the effect. It has a function to control and execute a predetermined effect operation. Further, the effect control board 9012 has a function of detecting an operation on the stick controller 9031A based on a signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A and a function of detecting an operation on the push button 9031B based on a signal from the push sensor 9035B. It also has a function of causing the electric component for the effect to execute the effect operation according to the detected operation.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is an audio signal for outputting audio from the speakers 908L and 908R based on the signal from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes processing.

The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for controlling lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is a lamp that drives lighting / extinguishing in the game effect lamp 909 or the like based on a signal from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a driver circuit and the like.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal. Each of the effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, in which the first byte represents MODE and the second byte represents EXT. The first bit of the MODE data may be set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to "0" in advance.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM 90101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a RAM 90102 that provides a work area for game control. The computer 90103 includes a CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and an I / O 90105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. And transmission operations that output various signals are also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer to be the game control microcomputer 90100 may have at least a RAM 90102 built in in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I / O 90105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, a random number circuit 90104 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 90104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 90102, and the CPU 90103 The random value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The constituent table data and the like are stored.

In the RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

The I / O 90105 is configured to include, for example, an input port for inputting various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. To.

The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device. A random number circuit that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the 905 and the sub-image display device 9051 and the effect control CPU 90120. 90124 and I / O 90125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121 to execute the process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variation data to the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variation data, and the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the RAM 90122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and an effect control CPU 90120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 90120, ROM 90121, and RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

In the effect control board 9012, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number. The effect random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 90124, like the game random number used on the main board 9011, or the effect control CPU 90120 executes a predetermined computer program. It may be updated by software.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 35 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and reach effects. For example, the effect control execution data and the end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value are displayed. It is composed of included process data, is configured by combining pattern data, and is set as a usage pattern described later. Further, the pattern data that becomes the effect control pattern as it is is also stored, and the pattern data may be set as the effect control pattern that becomes the use pattern as it is.

The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 outputs a video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051 based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120, and outputs the video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 905. Display the production image on. As an example, the display control unit 90123 may be equipped with VDP, CGROM, VRAM, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU, GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing generally referred to as DSP. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits a display control command for designating an effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 905 to the display control unit 90123 according to the display control data included in the effect control pattern. The display control unit 90123 outputs a video signal for displaying the effect image designated by the display control command by using the data stored in the CGROM or the like in accordance with the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120. As a result, the video signal of the effect image under the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is output, and the effect image is displayed on the image display device 905.

The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. And are included. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051, a control signal transmitted to the audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 are transmitted. The control signal, the control signal transmitted to the drive motor 9052, and the like are output. An operation signal corresponding to the operation to the stick controller 9031A is input from the controller sensor unit 9035A to the input port of the I / O 90125, and an operation signal corresponding to the operation to the push button 9031B is input from the push sensor 9035B.

The image display device 905 includes a display panel composed of a liquid crystal panel or the like, a driver circuit for driving the display panel, or the like. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 90123 to the image display device 905 via the I / O 90125 based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit drives the display panel based on the input video signal, and displays the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the image display device 905.

With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the speakers 908L and 908R via the voice control board 9013 to output voice, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 via the lamp control board 9014. Alternatively, various effects are executed by displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123.

The drive motor 9052 is composed of, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and controls the sub-image display device 9051 to rotate clockwise and counterclockwise by driving according to a drive signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012.

As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor included in a predetermined ball launching device based on a predetermined operation of a ball striking operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a result, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area.

When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the passing gate 9041 and is detected by the gate switch 9021, the normal symbol start condition for executing the normal map game on the normal symbol display 9020 is set based on this detection. To establish. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended.

In the normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss".

In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal figure", the opening control is performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilting position, and the predetermined time is set. After that, the closing control to return to the vertical position is performed.

Whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is set to "per normal figure" as a predetermined specific display result depends on the variable display result such as when the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started. Is determined before the derivation display. In addition, the variable display period of the normal symbol is also determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed, such as when the normal symbol game is started.

When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first starting condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A. .. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting winning opening.

When the first special figure game is started or the second special figure game is started, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol is set as a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined. It is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the jackpot gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. Whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is "missing".

As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3" and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, a round game is executed in which the large winning opening is continuously opened during a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to generate. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 9023, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change" is included. For example, as a variable display result of a special symbol, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "non-probability", and when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed, the jackpot is displayed. The type is "probability change". As a round game in a jackpot game state in which the jackpot type is "probability variation" or "non-probability variation", there are 15 normal open rounds in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 as the first state advantageous to the player is a predetermined time. It is executed a predetermined number of times such as rounds. The jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is also called the normal open jackpot state. The jackpot game state based on the "big hit" when the jackpot type is "non-probability change" is called "non-probability change jackpot game state". Further, the jackpot game state based on the "big hit" when the jackpot type is "probability change" is called "probability change jackpot game state". The "big hit" when the big hit type is "non-probable change" may be called "non-probable change big hit", and the "big hit" when the big hit type is "probable change" may be called "probable change big hit".

After the jackpot game state ends, the variable display result may be controlled to a probabilistic state in which the probability of becoming a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied. Further, after the jackpot game state is completed, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until one of the predetermined number of special figure games being executed and the next big hit game state being started, whichever of the time saving end conditions is satisfied first. To. In addition, the remaining number of executions of the special figure game until the time saving end condition is satisfied may be referred to as the time saving remaining number of times. The time saving state and the probability change state are advantageous gaming states for the player.

In this embodiment, the game state after the non-probability change jackpot game state ends is a time saving state, but does not become a probability change state. In this embodiment, the gaming state after the probability variation jackpot gaming state ends is the time saving state and the probability variation control.

In the time-saving state, the normally variable winning ball device 906B is set to the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than in the non-time-saving state such as the normal state. Change. For example, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol" in each normal symbol game. The tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per normal" is set to be longer than in the normal state. The normal variable winning ball device 906B may be changed between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by the control of lengthening the length and the control of increasing the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 906B into an open state and a closed state in an advantageous change mode is called a high open control. By being controlled to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The normal state is a specific game state such as a big hit game state, or a game state other than a game state that is advantageous to the player such as a time saving state or a probability change state, and the variable display result in the normal drawing game is ". The probability of "hit a normal figure" and the probability of a variable display result in a special figure game becoming a "big hit" are controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The time saving state is also called "high base state", "high base", etc., and the gaming state that is not the time saving state is also called "low base state", "low base", "non-time saving state", "non-time saving" or the like. The probability change state in which the probability change control is performed is also called "high probability state", "high probability", etc., and the game state that is not the probability change state is "low probability state", "low probability", "non-probability change state", "non-probability change state". It is also called. The gaming state in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is also called "high accuracy high base state", "high accuracy high base" and the like. The gaming state when the time is shortened instead of the probability change state is also called "low probability high base state", "low probability high base state", or the like. The gaming state when the time is not shortened but is in the probabilistic state is also called "high probability low base state", "high probability low base state", or the like. A state that does not become either a time saving state or a probability change state, that is, a normal state is also called a "low probability low base state", a "low probability low base state", or the like.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A Of the second special figure game on the display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the display of the fourth special symbol are started in response to the start of any of the special figure games. In the first special figure game and the second special figure game, when a definite special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed, the "left" of the image display device 905 is synchronized with the timing of the derived display. In the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode. Here, the reach mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 form a part of the jackpot combination, the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continue to fluctuate. It is a display mode in which all or a part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", when the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination are still displayed. In the remaining decorative symbol display area that is not stopped, the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". This is a display mode in which the decorative design is synchronized and fluctuates while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination.

During the variable display of the decorative symbol, a character image different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905, a background image is displayed, and a moving image different from the decorative symbol is reproduced and displayed. The production is executed. These effects are called variable display during the variable display itself, together with the variable display of the decorative pattern itself. That is, the effect during variable display is an effect using an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 along with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a concept including the variable display itself of the decorative symbol. In this way, the effect during variable display is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Making the variable display mode a reach mode is also one of the effects during the variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 along with the variable display of the special symbol, the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation by the game effect lamp 909, etc. Or the like may be included.

A reach effect may be executed as a part of the above-mentioned variable display effect. The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode. The reach effect is to reduce the fluctuation speed of the decorative pattern, display a character image different from the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 905, change the display mode of the background image, or move the image different from the decorative pattern. By reproducing and displaying the image or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, it is an effect that performs an effect operation different from that before the reach mode. In this embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation when each reach effect is executed is higher in the order of super reach B, super reach A, and normal reach. The jackpot expectation is, for example, the ratio at which the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit", and here, the ratio at which the variable display result of the decorative symbol is "big hit". Hereinafter, when referring to the jackpot expectation of a special figure game, the jackpot expectation includes the ratio of the variable display result of the decorative symbol being "big hit".

Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the so-called look-ahead notice is executed based on the determination at the time of starting winning. The look-ahead notice is a notice of the jackpot expectation of the special figure game that is the target of the look-ahead determination. In this embodiment, as a look-ahead notice, a hold change effect is prepared in which a predetermined image acts on the hold display image of the target to change the display mode of the hold display image. The hold change effect is executed during the execution of the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure game executed before the target. The hold change effect may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the hold change effect is executed once for each of a plurality of variable displays of continuous or non-consecutive jumps, and the final of the hold display image of the target. The expected degree of big hit is announced by the display mode. The look-ahead notice is regarded as an effect separate from the variable display effect, but may be a part of the variable display effect.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that a big hit combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed. The decorative design that is stopped and displayed may differ depending on the jackpot type.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined non-reach combination are stopped. By being displayed, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed. Further, when the variable display result of the special symbol is "missing", as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination is configured. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that results in a non-specific display may be derived and displayed.

Next, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 will be described. The main board 9011 controls the progress of the game. Then, the main board 9011 transmits an effect control command to the effect control board 9012 according to the progress of the game. The effect control board 9012 performs various effects by executing effect control that controls the image display device 905 or the like based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. As a result, the game executed by the main board 9011 and the various effects executed by the effect control board 9012 are synchronized. Hereinafter, main effect control commands will be described with reference to FIG. 36. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

The command 8001 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the start of the first special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8002 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the start of the second special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display of the second special figure. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation start designation command. In addition, information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special figure or the variable display of the second special figure may be included in the variation pattern designation command described later. The fluctuation start designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

The command 81XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variable display for a variable display of a special symbol or a variable display of a decorative symbol. A numerical value corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is set in "XX" of the command. Further, the variation pattern specification command may also be a command for designating the variation start of the decorative symbol. The variation pattern specification command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

The command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. In this embodiment, display result specification commands corresponding to the variable display results are set. For example, a numerical value corresponding to the display result is set in "XX" in the command. The display result specification command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command for designating the end of the special figure game. The symbol confirmation specification command specifies that the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. The symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted at the end of the special symbol game.

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command for designating the background of the effect image displayed on the image display device 905. In this embodiment, the background is changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, the background designation command also specifies the game state. A numerical value corresponding to the background is set in "XX" in the command. The background designation command is transmitted at the timing when the game state can be changed, at the start of the special figure game, and the like.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state. The fanfare is executed at the start of the jackpot game state. It is a production that notifies that the jackpot game state has been reached. This command is sent at the start of the jackpot game state.

The command A300 (H) is an effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game state. The ending is an effect of notifying the end of the big hit game state, which is executed at the end of the big hit game state. This command is sent at the end of the last round game.

The command B100 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the first start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the first starting winning opening. The command B200 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the second start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command. The start prize designation command is transmitted when the start prize occurs.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the first start winning prize is generated and the number of reserved first special figures is increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the second start winning prize is generated and the number of the second special figure reserved storage is increased by one. These commands may be collectively referred to as special figure hold memory addition designation commands. The special figure hold memory addition designation command is transmitted when a start winning prize occurs.

The command C200 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the number of stored first special figures is reduced by one when the first special figure game is executed. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the number of the second special figure reserved storage is reduced by one when the second special figure game is executed. These commands may be collectively referred to as special figure hold memory subtraction specification commands. The special figure hold storage number subtraction specification command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command for designating the determination result of the look-ahead determination at the time of starting winning. As will be described in detail later, when the first start prize or the second start prize occurs, the random number values MR'1 to MR3'used to determine whether or not to make a big hit, the big hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are determined. Be extracted. In this embodiment, for the special figure game corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1'to MR3', among the extracted random number values MR1'to MR3' before the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied. Based on the random number value MR1'of, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit". The look-ahead determination refers to this determination, and the look-ahead determination is performed by the winning random number value determination process in step S90211 described later. The judgment result of the look-ahead judgment is set to "XX" in the judgment result specification command at the time of winning. The winning judgment result specification command is transmitted when the starting winning is generated.

Next, the main operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. In the following, the operation will be described with reference to a flowchart or the like, but in each operation, a process or the like that does not appear in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

On the main board 9011, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is, for example, the game control main process. In the game control main process, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings and the like after setting interrupt disable.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC supplied every predetermined period and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state, for example, a predetermined game control timer interrupt. Execute the process.

In the game control timer interrupt processing, the CPU 90103 performs games in the pachinko gaming machine 901 such as switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, and command control processing. Executes the process for controlling the progress of. At the end of the game control timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is set. As a result, the game control timer interrupt processing is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, every predetermined time, which is the supply interval of the interrupt request signal.

In the switch processing, each switch determines whether a detection signal has been input from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, and a count switch 9023 via a switch circuit 90110. This is a process of determining whether or not the switch is turned on for each switch and storing the determination result in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. The determination result stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is used in the special symbol process process and the normal symbol process process described later.

The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example.

The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the side of the main board 9011 by software. As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side include a random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern. And should be included.

The random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, and is "0". It can take any value from "65535".

The random value MR2'for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type to be either "probability variation" or "non-probability variation" when the variable display result is "big hit". It can take any value from "0" to "99".

The random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random number value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, and is "0". It can take any value of ~ "99".

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901, and the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is set as a "big hit". Determining whether or not to control the game state, determining the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern, controlling the display operation on the special symbol display device 904 based on the determination result, and winning the jackpot game state special variable winning ball device 907. Various processes are selected and executed in order to set the opening / closing operation of the mouth in a predetermined procedure. The details of the special symbol process processing will be described later, but by executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern are determined, the special symbol game is executed based on the result, and the jackpot game state. Etc. are realized.

In the normal symbol process processing, for example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 9041, if the number of holds does not reach the upper limit, the hold storage of the normal figure game is performed, or the hold memory is used to variably display the normal symbol game. The result and fluctuation pattern can be determined, the display operation on the normal symbol display 9020 can be controlled according to the fluctuation pattern to execute the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variable display result of the normal symbol game can be derived and displayed. In the case of "per normal drawing", a process of opening the normally variable winning ball device 906B is performed. By executing the normal symbol process process each time a timer interrupt occurs, the normal symbol game can be executed, and the normal variable winning ball device 906B can be opened for a predetermined period when the normal symbol is hit.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process, etc., the transmission setting of the control command is performed, and in the command control process, the process of actually transmitting the control command set to be transmitted to the effect control board 9012 is performed. Will be done.

Next, the special figure process processing will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101.

When the start winning prize determination process is started, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the first starting port switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A is turned on ( Step S90201). For example, when the determination result that the first start port switch 9022A is determined to be in the ON state in the switch processing is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, the first start port switch 9022A is ON. You just have to judge. When the first start port switch 9022A is turned on (step S90201; YES), whether or not the number of reserved first special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved storages of the first special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value. Is determined (step S90202). At this time, the CPU 90103 specifies the first special figure reserved storage number by reading the first special figure reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. I hope I can. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; NO), the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to "1". Set (step S90203).

When the first start port switch 9022A is off in step S90201 (step S90201; NO), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; YES), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start opening switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 906B is turned on (step S90204). For example, when the determination result that the second start port switch 9022B is determined to be in the ON state in the switch processing is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, the second start port switch 9022B is ON. You just have to judge. When it is determined that the second start port switch 9022B is ON (step S90204; YES), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the second special figure game, becomes a predetermined upper limit value. Whether or not it is determined (step S90205). At this time, the CPU 90103 specifies the second special figure reserved storage number by reading the second special figure reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second special figure reserved storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. I hope I can. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; NO), the start port buffer value is set to "2" (step S90206). If the second start port switch 9022B is not turned on (step S90204; NO), or if the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S90205; YES), the start winning determination process is terminated.

After executing any of the processes of steps S90203 and S90206, the hold storage count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be added by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold memory count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the first special figure reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the first starting condition for the game ball to enter the first starting winning opening is satisfied. Further, the second special figure reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the second start condition for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is satisfied. At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S90208).

After executing the process of step S90208, the CPU 90103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S90209). As an example, in the process of step S90209, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 or the random counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination are used. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'and the random number value MR3' for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 39 (A). On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 39 (B). When the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 90103 controls the first hold display 9025A to display a display capable of specifying the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. You may let the first hold indicator 9025A do it. When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 90103 controls the second hold display 9025B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure hold storage added by one. The second hold indicator 9025B may be allowed to perform this.

The first special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 39 (A) has not been started yet, although the game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the first starting winning has been generated. Stores the pending data of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening, and the CPU 90103 extracts from the random number circuit 90104 or the like based on the establishment of the first start condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2' for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data, and the number of stored values is a predetermined upper limit value. Remember until you reach. In this embodiment, in this way, the first special figure game that has not yet been started is stored as a hold memory.

The second special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 39 (B) is still started although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B and the second starting winning is generated. Stores the pending data of the second special figure game. As an example, the second special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order of winning in the second start winning opening, and the CPU 90103 extracts from the random number circuit 90104 or the like based on the establishment of the second start condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2' for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern are set as pending data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit. Remember until you reach it. In this embodiment, in this way, the second special figure game that has not yet been started is stored as a hold memory.

After that, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed (step S90211). FIG. 40 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process. In the prize-winning random number value determination process, the CPU 90103 first sets the transmission of the first start prize designation command if the start port buffer value is "1", and then transmits the first special figure hold storage number addition designation command. If the setting is made and the start port buffer value is "2", the transmission setting of the second start winning prize designation command is made, and then the transmission setting of the second special figure hold storage number addition designation command is performed (step S90401).

Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the current jackpot game state is present (step S90402). Whether or not the current jackpot game state is present can be specified by, for example, the value of the special figure process flag described later. Here, if it is "4" to "7", it is in the big hit game state. When the value of the special figure process flag is other than "4" to "7" and the jackpot game state is not in progress (step S90402; NO), it is determined whether or not the current time is shortened (step S90403). Whether or not the current state is the time saving state may be specified by the state of the time saving flag. When the time saving flag is on and the current time saving state is in the time saving state (step S9403; YES), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “2” (step S90404).

When the start port buffer value is "2" (step S90404; YES), or when the time saving state is not in progress (step S90403; NO), the CPU 90103 is held this time based on the random number value MR1'extracted in step S90209. It is determined whether or not the display result of the special figure game is a "big hit" (step S90405). In the determination, the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table, which is referred to when determining the special figure display result at the start of the special figure game, is referred to. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a numerical value compared with the random number value MR1'is a" big hit "or" It suffices if it is assigned to "loss". When the gaming state is not the probabilistic state, the first special figure display result determination table is referred to, and when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the second special figure display result determination table is referred to. Whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state may be specified based on the probabilistic flag provided in the RAM 90102 and turned on in the probabilistic state.

In step S90405, the CPU 90103 sets the range of the determined value assigned to the "big hit" in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table as the jackpot determination range. In the probable change state, "8000" to "9899" are set as the jackpot determination range, and in the non-probability change state, "8000" to "8189" are set as the jackpot determination range. Then, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1'of this time is within the set jackpot determination range.

When the random value MR1'this time is within the jackpot judgment range and it is determined that the special figure display result of the special figure game held this time is "big hit" (step S90405; YES), the jackpot is designated as the judgment result. Set the transmission of the winning determination result specification command (step S90406). Since "02" of the EXT data is set in the jackpot determination result (see FIG. 40 (B)), the transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

When it is determined that the random number value MR1'is not within the jackpot judgment range and the special figure display result of the special figure game held this time is "missing" (step S90405; NO), when the winning is specified as the judgment result. Set the transmission of the determination result specification command (step S90407). Since "01" of the EXT data is set in the loss determination result (see FIG. 40 (B)), the transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

When the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7" and the jackpot game state is in progress (step S90402; YES), or when the start port buffer value is "1" (step S90404; NO), the look-ahead notice In order to limit the execution of the above, the transmission setting of the winning determination result specification command for designating no determination as the determination result is performed (step S90408). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice is restricted on the effect control board 9012 side. Since "00" of the EXT data is set in the judgment result without the judgment (see FIG. 40 (B)), the transmission setting of the winning judgment result designation command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

By restricting the execution of the look-ahead effect for the first start-up prize in the time-saving state and the start-up prize in the big hit game state, it is possible to prevent the execution of the look-ahead effect at an inappropriate timing.

After steps S90406, S90407, and S90408, the winning random number value determination process ends.

In addition, one set of each command set to be transmitted in the process is collectively transmitted in the subsequent command control process as a command at the time of starting winning. The set of the 1st start prize designation command, the 1st special figure hold memory number addition designation command, and the prize judgment result designation command is called the 1st start prize designation command, and the 2nd start prize designation command and the 2nd special figure hold. The set of the memory number addition designation command and the winning judgment result designation command is called the second start winning command.

Returning to FIG. 40, after the winning random number value determination process in step S9021, the CPU 90103 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S90212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step S90212; "2"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90213), and then the start prize is won. The judgment process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "1" (step S90212; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90214). The process proceeds to step S90204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. And execute.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol hold storage number is "0" (step S90231). The CPU 90103 may determine whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number count value is "0".

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; NO), the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, for example, the head area of the second special figure hold storage unit. The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out (step S90232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in the process of step S90209 corresponding to the occurrence of the start prize at the second start prize opening are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding memory count value and updating, the second special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure is updated. The storage content in the hold storage unit is shifted (step S90233). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to "2" (step S90234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S90235). The CPU 90103 may determine whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number count value is "0". As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is determined to be "0" in step S90231, and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the execution of the second special figure game is started with priority over the first special figure game.

When the number of reserved first special figures is other than "0" in step S90235 (step S90235; NO), the reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, for example, the head area of the first special figure reserved storage unit. The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out (step S90236). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in the process of step S90209 corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning at the first starting winning opening are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number and updating it, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure is updated. The storage content in the hold storage unit is shifted (step S90237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "loss" (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 90103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 42 (A) as a table to be used when the current state is in the non-probable change state, and the CPU 90103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 2 Set the special figure display result determination table as the table to be used. In each special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the "big hit" or "loss" that is the determination result. I just need to be there.

The CPU 90103 reads numerical data indicating a random number value MR1'for determining a special figure display result included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variable random number buffer in step S9022 or S90236 from the variable random number buffer, and reads the random number value MR1. Refer to the first or second special figure display result determination table set as the table to be used based on the numerical data indicating ′, and match the random number value MR1 ′ in the reference first or second special figure display result determination table. The "big hit" or "loss" assigned to the determined value may be determined as the result of displaying the special figure this time. When the random number value MR1'is "9000", the CPU 90103 determines that the special figure display result is set to "big hit" by referring to the second special figure display result determination table when the probability change flag is on. , When the probability change flag is off, it is determined that the special figure display result is set to "miss" by referring to the first special figure display result determination table.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is determined as a "big hit" at a higher determination rate than in the non-probability state. Therefore, for example, the current state is the probability change state based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is "probability change" by the jackpot end processing of step S90117 shown in FIG. 37. Occasionally, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and a big hit game state is more likely to occur than in the non-probability change state. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the present is in a probabilistic state.

After that, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S90239 is a "big hit" (step S90240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S90240; YES), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to the on state (step S90241). Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 90101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. For example, the CPU 90103 sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 43 as the table to be used. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type may be assigned to "non-probability variation" or "probability variation" as the determination result. ..

The CPU 90103 reads the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2'included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variable random number buffer in step S9022 or S90236 from the variable random number buffer and reads it from the variable random number buffer. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type determination table set in the used table is referred to, and the determined value that matches the random number value MR2'is assigned in the referenced jackpot type determination table. The "non-probability change" or "probability change" may be determined as the jackpot type this time.

After executing the process of step S90242, the determined jackpot type is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 may store the jackpot type by storing the jackpot type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

When the special symbol display result is not "big hit" (step S90240; NO), or after step S90243, a definite special symbol which is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined (step S90244). As an example, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a final special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of jackpot symbols is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type in step S90242. It may be decided as a definite special symbol.

After executing the process of step S90244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S90245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in step S90245, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the number of reserved memory of the first special figure game is "0" in step S90235 (step S90235; YES), the predetermined demo display setting is made (step S90246), and then the special symbol normal processing ends. .. In this demo display setting, is the effect control command for designating the start of the demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905, for example, transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012? Judge whether or not. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the demo display start specification command is set to be transmitted, and then the demo display setting is terminated. The effect control board 9012 displays the demo screen when the demo display start designation command is transmitted.

The fluctuation pattern setting process in step S90111 in FIG. 37 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90111 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S90261). Then, when the jackpot flag is on (step S90261; YES), the jackpot variation pattern is determined with reference to the jackpot variation pattern determination table (step S90262). When the jackpot flag is off (step S90261; NO), the loss time variation pattern is determined with reference to the loss variation pattern determination table (step S90263).

FIG. 45 shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns PA1'-1, PA2'-1, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 are prepared as fluctuation patterns at the time of loss. Further, as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, fluctuation patterns PB3'-2 to PB3'-4 are prepared.

The fluctuation patterns PA1'-1 and PA2'-1 among the fluctuation patterns at the time of loss are non-reach fluctuation patterns that specify non-reach. The variation pattern PA2'-1 is a non-reach variation pattern for shortening the time when the special figure variation time is shorter than usual. The fluctuation patterns PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 among the fluctuation patterns at the time of loss are reach fluctuation patterns for designating reach. The variation pattern PA3'-2 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA3'-3 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the development from the execution of the normal reach to the super reach A. The variation pattern PA3'-4 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the development from the execution of the normal reach to the super reach B.

The fluctuation pattern PB3'-2 among the jackpot fluctuation patterns is a reach fluctuation pattern that specifies the execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB3'-3 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the development from the execution of the normal reach to the super reach A. The variation pattern PB3'-4 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the development from the execution of the normal reach to the super reach B.

In step S90262, for example, the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 46, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3'for jackpot determination may be assigned to any of the jackpot fluctuation patterns that will be the determination result. In step S90262, the CPU 90103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3'read from the variation random number buffer, and in the jackpot variation pattern determination table to be referred to. Any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3'-2 to PB3'-4 assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3'may be determined as the current jackpot fluctuation pattern.

In FIG. 46, the determination ratio is shown instead of the range of determination values. In the actual table, the determination values in the range corresponding to the determination ratio in FIG. 46 may be assigned to each fluctuation pattern. For example, in FIG. 46, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB3'-2 is 10/100, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB3'-3 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB3'-4 is 70 /. Since it is 100, the fluctuation pattern PB3'-2 is assigned a decision value 0 to 9 to be compared with the random value MR3', and the fluctuation pattern PB3'-3 is assigned a decision value 10 to 29 to be compared with the random value MR3'. The fluctuation pattern PB3'-4 is assigned a determination value 30 to 99 to be compared with the random number value MR3'. The same is true for other tables that describe the decision rate.

In step S90263, when the current gaming state is the non-time saving state, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 (A) is referred to. When the current gaming state is the time saving state, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 (B) is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3'for determination of the fluctuation pattern is one of the loss-time fluctuation patterns that is the determination result. It suffices if it is assigned. In step S90263, the CPU 90103 uses either the first or second loss variation pattern determination table set as the usage pattern based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3'read from the variation random number buffer. Any of the variation patterns PA1'-1, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3'in the first or second loss variation pattern determination table to be referred to. Alternatively, any of the fluctuation patterns PA2'-1, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 may be determined as the current fluctuation pattern at the time of loss.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 47, the variation pattern PA2'-1 having a short special figure variation time is easily selected in the time saving state, and is averaged in the time saving state as compared with the non-time saving state. Variable display time can be shortened to suppress the occurrence of invalid start winnings, and it is possible to reduce the player from stopping the launch of the game ball. In addition, the execution frequency of the variable display can be increased.

With reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, at the time of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PB3'-4 for executing super reach B, the fluctuation pattern PB3'-3 for executing super reach A, and the fluctuation pattern PB3'-2 for executing normal reach are in that order. The decision rate is high. The high and low of the determination rate of each fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is the opposite. For this reason, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of Super Reach A and Normal Reach, the ratio of the variable display result becoming a "big hit" decreases.

After executing step S90262 or S90263, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is set (step S90264). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. The special symbol fluctuation time is specified by each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 90103 changes the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol by setting the special symbol fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of step S90262 or S90263. The timing at which the display result is derived can be set. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

Following the process of step S90264, one of the first special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 904B for which the start condition is satisfied. Is set to start the fluctuation of the special symbol so as to start (step S90265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. When the CPU 90103 starts the first special figure game, the CPU 90103 controls the first hold display 9025A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted first special figure hold storage number by the first hold display 9025A. May be done. Further, when the second special figure game is started, the CPU 90103 controls the second hold display 9025B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number 9025B. May be done.

After that, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 side of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, and the like, the command transmission setting at the start of the variation of the special symbol is set (step S90266). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the background designation command are used as the fluctuation start command corresponding to the first special figure game. , 1st special figure Set the transmission for sequentially transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction specification command. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the background designation command are used as the fluctuation start command corresponding to the second special figure game. , 2nd special figure Set the transmission for sequentially transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction specification command. These commands are sequentially transmitted by one timer interrupt in the subsequent command control process.

After executing the process of step S90266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S90267), and then the variation pattern setting process ends. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S90267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 of FIG. 37 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S9011 has elapsed. For example, by subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer whose initial value is set in step S90111 and determining whether or not the subtracted timer value becomes "0", whether or not the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed. It may be judged whether or not. When the timer value of the game control process timer is not 0, the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed, so the first special symbol display device 904A or the first special symbol display device 904A or the like is controlled to execute the variable display of the special figure in the special figure game. The second special symbol display device 904B performs a process for changing the special symbol, and ends the special symbol variation process. On the other hand, when the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0 and the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display The device 904B controls to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, stops and displays the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol, sets the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and sets the value of the special symbol process flag to "3". Update to. By repeatedly executing step S90112 when a timer interrupt occurs, variable display of the special symbol, derivation display of the confirmed special symbol, and the like are realized.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 90103 determines whether the jackpot flag is on. When the jackpot flag is on, the time saving flag and the probability change flag are reset, and the count value of the time saving number of times, which is provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 and counts the remaining number of times of the variable display executed during the time saving state, is set. The process of resetting to "0" is performed. Then, the timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time is set in the game control process timer as the initial value. Then, "15" is set as an initial value in the round number counter for counting the round games provided in the RAM 90102. After that, the setting to send the hit start designation command is made, the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", and the special symbol stop processing is terminated. Since the game state may be changed here, the background specification command may be set to be transmitted.

When the jackpot flag is off, it is determined whether the time reduction flag is on, and when it is on, the count value of the time reduction counter is subtracted by "1". After that, it is determined whether the count value after subtracting "1" is "0", and if the count value is "0", the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. Turn off the time saving flag to finish. After that, set the transmission to send the background specification command based on the state of the probability change flag. If the time saving flag is off, the count value after subtracting "1" is not "0", or after setting the background specification command transmission, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". The special symbol stop processing is terminated.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this jackpot opening pre-processing, for example, the timer value of the game control process timer is subtracted. If the timer value after subtraction is not "0", it means that the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so that the jackpot opening pre-processing ends. When the timer value after subtraction is "0", it means that the fanfare waiting time has elapsed and the start timing of the round game has come. In this case, the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state to open the big winning opening, and setting the timer value corresponding to the upper limit of the period for keeping the big winning opening open in the game control process timer. Processing etc. is executed. When the process of opening the large winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". By repeating step S90114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game, opening of the big winning opening, and the like are realized.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the timer value of the game control process timer is subtracted by 1, the timer value after the subtraction is 1, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 in one round game, and the like. Based on this, a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included.

When it is determined that the timer value after subtracting 1 becomes 0 or the number of detected game balls reaches a predetermined number, it is time to close the big winning opening, so the big winning opening is closed. The process of returning to is executed, the process of setting the timer value corresponding to the closing time of the big winning opening in the game control process timer, the process of subtracting the count value of the round number counter by 1, and the like are executed. If the timer value after subtracting 1 does not become 0 and the number of detected game balls does not reach the predetermined number, a process for maintaining the open state of the big winning opening is performed to open the big hit. End the intermediate processing. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the process during the big hit opening process is terminated.

By repeating step S90115 each time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the large winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state, and finally the large winning opening is closed.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this jackpot release post-processing, processing for determining whether or not the count value of the round number counter has become "0", processing for decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when it has not become "0", etc. Will be done.

If it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is "0", it means that the round game has reached the upper limit, so the timer value corresponding to the ending waiting time doctor is set to the game control process timer in the game control process. Set to timer. In addition, the setting to send the hit end specification command is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

When the timer value of the game control process timer is decremented by 1, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0. If it is not 0, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state. Is maintained, and the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the timer value corresponding to the process of opening the large winning opening and the upper limit of the period of opening the large winning opening is set in the game control process timer. Processing etc. is executed. When the process of opening the large winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "5".

Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S90115 and S90116 for each timer interrupt after the big winning opening is opened in step S90114.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed. If the timer value decremented by 1 is not 0, the ending has not been completed, so the jackpot end processing is terminated as it is. When the timer value subtracted by 1 becomes 0, the ending ends, so the states of the time reduction flag, the time reduction count counter, the probability change flag, and the like are set according to the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type buffer.

For example, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the jackpot type is "probability change", and if it is a probabilistic change, turns on the time saving flag and the probability change flag, and counts the initial value in the time saving number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. Is set to "100". If the jackpot type is "non-probability change", only the time saving flag is turned on, and "100" is set as the initial count value in the time saving number counter. After that, various data such as the game control process timer, the jackpot type buffer set value, and the states of various flags are appropriately reset, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Next, the main operations of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute, for example, a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, set the CTC registers mounted on the effect control board 9012, and the like. I do. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122 is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time elapses, for example, based on the CTC register setting or the like in the timer interrupt process executed separately from the effect control main process. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits. Therefore, the command analysis process and the effect control process process, which will be described later, are executed every time a timer interrupt occurs.

Further, on the effect control board 9012 side, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but interrupts when using a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 90125, a control signal that becomes an effect control command is transmitted from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. After that, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer is read and analyzed, and the settings and controls corresponding to the analysis results are set and controlled. Do.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process process, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 9011. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed. In the effect random number update process, the software updates numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 90122 as various random number values used for the effect control. After that, the determination of whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on is executed again.

Next, the command analysis process will be described. In the command analysis process, the received command stored in the effect control command reception buffer is analyzed, which effect control command the received command is, and processing is performed according to the specified effect control command. When a plurality of reception commands are stored in the effect control command reception buffer, analysis or the like is performed for each reception command.

FIG. 48 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis and the processing content corresponding to the effect control command. Each command reception flag and each command storage area in FIG. 48 are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. In addition, setting each command reception flag means turning the flag on. The state of each command reception flag and the commands stored in each command storage area may be reset or deleted at appropriate timings. The first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer are also provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), a hold display number serving as a buffer number is set in the command buffer at the time of winning the first start. A set of commands including the first start winning prize designation command, the first special figure hold storage number addition designation command, and the winning judgment result designation command is a storage area corresponding to the first hold display numbers "1" to "4". It is stored in order from the beginning of the free space in.

As shown in FIG. 49 (B), a hold display number serving as a buffer number is set in the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. A set of commands consisting of the second start winning prize designation command, the second special figure hold storage number addition designation command, and the winning judgment result designation command is a storage area corresponding to the second hold display numbers "1" to "4". It is stored in order from the beginning of the free space in.

The winning judgment result designation command is stored in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning when the first start winning designation command reception flag is on, and the second start when the second start winning designation command reception flag is on. It is stored in the command buffer at the time of winning. In one start winning, the start winning designation command is transmitted before the winning judgment result designation command, so it depends on the state of the first start winning designation command reception flag and the second start winning designation command reception flag. By specifying the storage destination of the start prize designation command, each command of the first start prize command transmitted from the main board 9011 when the first start prize occurs is stored in the first start prize command buffer as one set. Then, each command of the start winning command transmitted from the main board 9011 when the second start winning is generated is stored in the second starting winning command buffer as one set.

Further, each of the command reception flags for specifying the determination result at the time of winning 1st to 1-4 in FIG. 48 is provided corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. When the winning judgment result specification command is stored in the first start winning command buffer, the winning judgment result stored this time among the 1st to 1-4th winning judgment result specification command reception flags is stored. The flag corresponding to the hold display number of the specified command is turned on. For example, when the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "1", the 1-1 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on, and the holding display number "2" is corresponded to. When the winning judgment result specification command is stored, the 1-2 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on, and when the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "3", the first 1-3 When the winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on and the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "4", the 1-4th winning judgment result specification command reception flag is set. Turn on.

Each of the 2nd to 2nd to 4th winning judgment result designation command reception flags in FIG. 48 is provided corresponding to each of the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the second start winning command buffer. , When the winning judgment result specification command is stored in the second start winning command buffer, the winning judgment result specification command stored this time among the 2-1 to 2-4 winning judgment result specification command reception flags The flag corresponding to the hold display number of is turned on. For example, when the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "1", the 2-1 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on and the hold display number "2" is corresponded to. When the winning judgment result specification command is stored, the 2nd 2nd winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on, and when the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "3", the second 2-3 When the winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on and the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "4", the 2-4 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is set. Turn on.

The first 1-1 to 1-4 winning judgment result designation commands and the 2-1 to 2-4 winning judgment result designation commands are collectively referred to as winning judgment result designation commands.

Since the winning judgment result specification command is transmitted last in one starting winning command, whether or not a new starting winning command has been received depending on the state of each of the above winning judgment result specification command reception flags. In addition, it is possible to specify which of the hold display numbers of the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer the newly received start winning command is stored.

Since the command at the time of the first start winning is transmitted from the main board 9011 in response to the occurrence of the hold of the first special figure game, when the hold of the first special figure game occurs, it is sent to the command buffer at the time of the first start prize. One set of received commands to be stored will be increased by one. Since the command at the time of the second start winning is transmitted from the main board 9011 in response to the occurrence of the hold of the second special figure game, at the time of the second start winning in response to the occurrence of the hold of the second special figure game. One set of received commands stored in the command buffer will be increased by one.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the first special figure game is executed, the commands at the time of the first start winning, which are stored corresponding to the first hold display numbers "2" to "4", are the higher numbers. 1 The hold display number is shifted from "1" to "3". Further, when the second special figure game is executed, the second start winning command stored corresponding to the second hold display numbers "2" to "4" is the second hold display number "1" which is a higher number. Is shifted to "3".

With the above configuration, the hold display number of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning and the hold number of the hold storage unit of the first special figure are stored corresponding to the same number, and the command at the time of the first start win and the hold data are stored. The number of commands at the time of the first start winning, which is stored in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, is the same as the number of the first special figure hold storage number of the first special figure game. In addition, the hold display number of the second start winning command buffer and the hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit are stored corresponding to the same number, and the second start prize command and the hold data correspond to each other. Therefore, the number of the second start winning commands stored in the second start winning command buffer is the same as the number of the second special figure reserved memory of the second special figure game.

It should be noted that each hold display number in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer also corresponds to each display position of the hold display image. Specifically, each hold display number of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning corresponds to each display position of the first hold display image provided in the area 905HA of the display area 905H, and the hold display number "1" is The leftmost display position in the area 905HA, the hold display number "2" corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 905HA, and the hold display number "3" corresponds to the third display position from the left in the area 905HA. Corresponds to, and the hold display number "4" corresponds to the fourth display position from the left in the area 905HA. Further, each hold display number of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning corresponds to each display position of the second hold display image provided in the area 905HB of the display area 905H, and the hold display number "1" is in the area 905HB. Corresponding to the leftmost display position, the hold display number "2" corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 905HB, and the hold display number "3" corresponds to the third display position from the left in the area 905HB. , The hold display number "4" corresponds to the fourth display position from the left in the area 905HB.

Further, the hold change effect execution pattern and the action effect execution pattern are stored in each of the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer. The hold change effect execution pattern will be described in detail later, but it specifies the execution pattern of the hold change effect, and is stored corresponding to the start winning command corresponding to the special figure game of the target of the hold change effect. .. Similarly, the action effect execution pattern specifies the execution pattern of the action effect, and is stored corresponding to the start winning command corresponding to the special figure game of the target of the action effect.

In the start winning command buffer of FIG. 49, "0000 (H)" indicates that the command is not stored, and "-" stores both the hold change effect execution pattern and the action effect execution pattern. Indicates that it has not been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, in the command analysis process, when the background designation command is received, the state of the high accuracy flag and the state of the high base flag are switched according to the background designated by the background designation command.

Next, the effect control process processing will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes the hold change effect setting process (step S90161), and then, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122, the following Any of the processes of steps S90170 to S90175 as described above is selected and executed.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the hold change effect setting process. In the hold change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received this time (step S90671). For example, if any of the 1st to 1st to 1-4th winning judgment result designation command reception flags and the 2nd to 2nd to 2nd to 4th winning judgment result designation command reception flags are on, the start is started. Since the winning command is newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer, it is determined that a new starting winning command has been received. When a plurality of flags among the above-mentioned winning judgment result specification command reception flags are turned on, the second start winning command having the largest hold display number is used as the "newly received start winning command". The following processing is executed for each command as the "newly received start winning command" of the start winning command of the hold display number corresponding to each of the plurality of turned-on flags. You may do so. Of the first start winning command and the second start winning command stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer, which start winning command is the "newly received start winning command". Can be specified by which of the winning judgment result specification command reception flags that are in the ON state. For example, if the 1-3 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is on, the first starting winning command stored in the hold display number "3" of the first starting winning command buffer is "newly received". It becomes a "start winning command", and if the 2-2 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is on, the second starting winning command is stored in the hold display number "2" of the second starting winning command buffer. The command becomes "newly received start winning command".

When there is no reception of a new start winning command (step S90671; NO) because both the first winning judgment result designation command reception flag and the second winning judgment result designation command reception flag are off. Since the hold change effect is not executed, the hold change effect setting process is terminated.

When a new start winning command is received (step S90671; YES), it is determined whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "1" (step S90672), and the new start winning command is received. If the hold display number corresponding to the start winning command received in is not "1" (step S90672; NO), the winning judgment result specification command included in the newly received start winning command is "No judgment". Is specified as the determination result (step S90673).

When the winning judgment result specification command does not specify "no judgment" as the judgment result (step S90673; NO), the hold change effect execution pattern is set in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674), and if neither the hold change effect execution pattern nor the action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674: NO), the hold change effect is performed. Whether or not to execute the command is determined (step S90675). In step S90675, for example, whether or not to execute the hold change effect is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 52.

In step S90675, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR1'for determining whether or not to execute the hold change effect updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR1', it is determined whether or not to execute the hold change effect by referring to the hold change effect execution decision table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the hold change effect execution decision table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR1'is "executed" or "executed", which is the decision result in a range different depending on the winning judgment result specified by the winning judgment result specification command. It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of "no execution". In the hold change effect execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the hold change effect if the decision result assigned according to the winning determination result to the decision value that matches the random number value SR1'extracted this time is "executed". Is determined to be executed, and if "not executed", it is determined not to execute the hold change effect.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 52, when the winning determination result is "big hit", the hold change effect is more likely to be executed than when the winning determination result is "missing". On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "missing", the opposite is true. Therefore, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation of the variable display of the target is higher than when it is not executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the action effect is executed (step S90676). Here, the action effect is an effect of whether or not a predetermined image acts on the hold display image. The action effect includes an action success effect in which the predetermined image acts on the hold display image and an action failure effect in which the predetermined image does not act on the hold display image.

In this embodiment, as an action effect, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated to act on the hold display image with the image of the arrow shot by the predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051. Perform the production of whether or not. In this embodiment, an arrow shot on a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 hits the hold display image, and a successful action effect and a shot on the predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051. It is possible to perform an action failure effect in which the arrow does not hit the hold display image. Then, when the action success effect is executed, the hold change effect is executed to change the mode of the hold display image, and when the action failure effect is executed, the hold change effect is not executed and the hold display image is displayed. Does not change.

In step S90676, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the action effect is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 53.

In step S90676, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR2'for determining whether or not to execute the action effect updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR2', the presence or absence of execution of the action effect is determined with reference to the action effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the action effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR2'is [2] or [3] or [4] as the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command. It may be assigned to the decision result of "execution" or "no execution", which is the determination result, within a range different depending on whether or not the pending change effect is executed. In the effect control execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 has a decision value that matches the random number value SR2'extracted this time, and whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2] or [3]. ] Or [4], and if the decision result assigned according to whether or not the pending change effect is executed is "execution", it is determined that the action effect is executed, and if "no execution", the action effect is performed. Decide not to run.

As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 53, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2], the action effect is not executed. In addition, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] or [4], the hold change effect is "executed", and the hold change effect is "not executed". It is easier to execute the action effect. On the other hand, when the pending change effect is "no execution", the opposite is true. Therefore, when the action effect is executed, the expectation that the hold change effect is executed is higher than when the action effect is not executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in step S90675 whether or not it is determined to execute the hold change effect (step S90677), and if there is execution (step S90677; YES), the hold change effect is executed. The hold change effect execution pattern is determined (step S90678). When it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed, in step S90678, for example, the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 54. Specifically, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "2", the hold change effect pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 54 (A). Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "3", the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 54 (B). Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "4", the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 54 (C).

As described above, the hold change effect execution pattern is stored in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning or the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and the special figure game before the target is executed together with the corresponding start winning command. When, it is shifted to the upper position of the hold display number. The hold change effect execution pattern without the action effect specifies the hold display number when the hold change effect is executed and the mode of change of the hold display image at that time, and the hold change effect execution pattern HP1' -1 to HP1'-2, HP2'-1 to HP2'-2, and HP3'-1 to HP3'-2 are available.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP1'-1 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1]. This is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image of the target from white to green.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP2'-2 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. In the variable display executed when the display color of the hold display image of the target is changed from white to green and the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1], the hold change effect is again produced. Is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image of the target from green to red.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP3'-1 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [3]. In the variable display executed when the display color of the hold display image of the target is changed from white to green and the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] and [1]. , This is a hold change effect execution pattern in which the display color of the hold display image of the target remains green without executing the hold change effect again.

When it is determined in step S90676 to execute the action effect, in step S90678, for example, the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 55. Specifically, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "3", the hold change effect pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 55 (A). Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "4", the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 55 (B).

The hold change effect execution pattern accompanied by the action effect is the hold display number when the hold change effect is executed, the mode of changing the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 at that time, and the mode of the change of the hold display image at that time. Is specified, and the pending change effect execution patterns HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-1 to HP7' -2 is prepared.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP4'-1 is the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. After executing the action failure effect by rotating from vertical to diagonally, the display color of the hold display image of the target remains white without executing the hold change effect, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number [ In the variable display executed when the image is shifted to the storage area corresponding to 1], the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated diagonally to the side to execute the action success effect, and then the hold change effect is executed. This is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image of the target from white to green.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP5'-2 is the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. After executing the action success effect by rotating from vertical to horizontal, the hold change effect is executed to change the display color of the target hold display image from white to green, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number. In the variable display executed when the image is shifted to the storage area corresponding to [1], the sub-image display device 9051 is left in the horizontal direction to perform the action success effect, and then the hold change effect is executed again to display the target. This is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image from green to red.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP7'-1 is the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [3]. After executing the action success effect by rotating from vertical to horizontal, the hold change effect is executed to change the display color of the target hold display image from white to green, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number. In the variable display executed when shifting to the storage area corresponding to [2], the action failure effect is executed with the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 changed from vertical to horizontal, and then the hold change effect is not executed again. In the variable display executed when the display color of the hold display image of the target remains green and the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1], the sub-image display device 9051 This is a hold change effect execution pattern in which the display color of the hold display image of the target remains green without executing the hold change effect again after executing the action failure effect with the direction of is left horizontal.

In step S90678, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR3'for determining the pending change effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR3', the pending change is referred to by any of the first reserved change effect execution pattern determination table to the fifth reserved change effect execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. Determine the production execution pattern.

The first hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2] when it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed. .. In the first pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It may be assigned to the effect execution pattern HP1'-1 or HP1'-2.

The second hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] when it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed. .. In the second pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It suffices if it is assigned to the effect execution pattern HP1'-1, HP1'-2, HP2'-1, and HP2'-2.

The third hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [4] when it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed. .. In the third pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It suffices if it is assigned to the effect execution pattern HP1'-1, HP1'-2, HP3'-1, and HP3'-2.

The fourth hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] when it is determined in step S90676 to execute the action effect. In the fourth pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It may be assigned to the effect execution patterns HP4'-1, HP4'-2, HP5'-1, and HP5'-2.

The fifth hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [4] when it is determined in step S90676 to execute the action effect. In the fifth pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It may be assigned to the effect execution patterns HP6'-1, HP6'-2, HP7'-1, and HP7'-2.

In each hold change effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 assigns one of the hold change effect execution patterns assigned to the decision value matching the random number value SR3'extracted this time according to the winning determination result. Determined as the effect execution pattern of the pending change effect.

As can be seen from the determination ratios in FIGS. 54 and 55, when the winning judgment result is "big hit", the display color of the hold display image finally becomes "red", and the hold change effect execution pattern becomes "green". It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern, and when the winning judgment result is "missing", the display color of the hold display image finally becomes "green". The hold change effect execution pattern becomes "red". It is easier to select than the pending change effect execution pattern. For this reason, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation of the target special figure game is higher when the final display color of the hold display image is "red" than when it is "green". Is expensive. For this reason, the hold change effect that sets the final display color of the hold display image to "red" foretells that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and sets the final display color of the hold display image to "green". The change effect is lower than "red", but it is foretold that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the hold change effect is not executed.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 55 (A), when the winning determination result is "big hit" and the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation. The hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "2 times" is easier to be selected than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "1 time", and the judgment result at the time of winning is "missing". When the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display in which the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation is "once" is "twice". It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of. Therefore, when the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is executed, if the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the period corresponding to the variable display of "once" by the sub-image display device 9051. The big hit expectation of the target special figure game is higher when the target is turned sideways for a period corresponding to the variable display of "twice" than when it is turned sideways over.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 55 (B), when the winning determination result is "big hit", when the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation. The hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "3 times" is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "2 times", and the judgment result at the time of winning is "missing". When the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display in which the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation is "2 times" is "3 times". It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of. Therefore, when the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is executed and the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the period corresponding to the variable display of "twice" by the sub-image display device 9051. The big hit expectation of the target special figure game is higher when the target is turned sideways for a period corresponding to the variable display of "3 times" than when it is turned sideways over.

For this reason, the sub-image display device 9051 foretells that the expectation of a big hit is the highest in the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect in which the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways for a period corresponding to the variable display of "3 times". It is foretold that the pending change effect with the action effect that turns sideways over the period corresponding to the variable display of "2 times" is lower than the case of "3 times", but the expectation of big hit is higher than that of "1 time". However, the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect in which the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways over the period corresponding to the variable display of "1 time" is lower than that in the case of "2 times", but the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is Foretell that the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

When there is no execution of the hold change effect (step S90677; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the action effect in step S90676 (step S90679), and when there is execution (step S90679; YES), the action effect execution pattern, which is the pattern for executing the action effect, is determined (step S90680). In step S90680, for example, the action effect execution pattern is determined at a determination rate similar to the determination rate of the hold change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. 55. For example, the pattern that defines only the change in the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the hold change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. 55 may be set as the action effect execution pattern.

After step S90678 or S90680, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determined hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern in association with the newly received start winning command (step S90681). As a result, it can be seen that the special figure game corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern is the target, and the execution timing of the hold change effect or the action effect depends on the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern. I understand.

After step S90681, if the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [1] (step S90672; YES), the winning judgment result specification command specifies "no judgment" as the judgment result. (Step S90673; YES), when the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674; YES), or when neither the hold change effect nor the action effect is executed (step S90679; NO). ), A process of updating the display of the hold display image in response to the reception of a new start winning command is performed (step S90682).

In step S90682, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123, it corresponds to the hold display number corresponding to the on-winning determination result designation command reception flag. , Performs a process of starting the display of the hold display image at the display position of the display area 905H. As a result, the hold display image corresponding to the newly received start winning command is newly displayed. The hold display image is displayed as a hold display image corresponding to the newly held special figure game until the newly held special figure game is executed.

The first hold display image displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold display number [1] of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning is at the time of the first start winning stored corresponding to the hold display number [1]. In addition to corresponding to commands, it also corresponds to the hold data corresponding to the hold number [1] of the first special figure hold storage unit, the first special figure game executed by the hold data, and the like. This also applies to each first hold display image displayed at each display position corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning.

The second hold display image displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold display number [1] of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning is the second start winning time stored corresponding to the hold display number [1]. In addition to corresponding to commands, it also corresponds to the hold data corresponding to the hold number [1] of the second special figure hold storage unit, the second special figure game executed by the hold data, and the like. This also applies to each second hold display image displayed at each display position corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning.

After step S90682, the hold change effect setting process ends. At this time, it is preferable to reset the state of the command reception flag for specifying the determination result at the time of winning.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a variable start designation command from the main board 9011 has been received. The determination may be made based on whether or not the fluctuation start designation command reception flag controlled by the command analysis process is turned on. When the variable start designation command is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the start of the special figure game, so the value of the effect process flag is set to "1" corresponding to the variable display start setting process. After updating to, the variable display start waiting process ends. If the variable start specification command has not been received, the variable display start wait process ends as it is.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the final stop symbol according to the variable display variation pattern and the variable display result this time (step S90321). The variation pattern may be specified based on the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 9011 and stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. The variable display result may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and stored in the display result designation command storage area.

For example, when the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern is a non-reach variable pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, a non-reach combination is configured. The combination of the final stop symbols is determined as the combination of the final decorative symbols. When the variable display result is "loss" and the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern that specifies "reach", the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined as the combination of the final decorative symbols. When the variable display result is "big hit", the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined as the combination of the final decorative symbols. Each combination of fixed decorative symbols is prepared in advance using a random number value updated by an effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90124 or the RAM 90122, and a determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121. It is advisable to randomly determine from the combination of fixed decorative patterns. The same decorative pattern constituting the jackpot combination may be different depending on the jackpot type.

After step S90321, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control pattern setting process (step S90322). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control pattern setting process. In the effect control pattern setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first shifts the stored contents of the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer (step S90901). Specifically, when the first variable start designation command is received, the first start prize is stored corresponding to the first hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the command buffer at the time of the first start prize. The hour command, the hold change effect execution pattern, or the action effect execution pattern is shifted to the first hold display numbers [1] to [3] of higher numbers, respectively. When the second variable start designation command is received, the second start winning command and the pending change are stored corresponding to the second hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the second start winning command buffer. The effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern is shifted to the second hold display numbers [1] to [3], which are higher numbers, respectively.

Next, the hold change effect execution pattern stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer of the person whose stored contents are shifted is checked (step S90902), and the hold change effect execution pattern or When the action effect execution pattern is stored, the hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern, and the actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern. Is the same, and it is confirmed whether or not it is necessary to execute the hold change effect or the action effect (step S90903).

The hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern is the same as the actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern, and the hold display effect or action effect is executed. In the case of (step S90903; YES), the effect control pattern for executing the hold change effect that changes the hold display image according to the mode of change of the hold display image at the current hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern. , The hold change that changes the hold display image in the change mode of the hold display image after executing the action effect in the displacement mode of the sub-image display device 9051 at the current hold display number specified in the hold change effect execution pattern. The effect control pattern for executing the effect effect or the effect control pattern for executing the effect effect is set in the mode of displacement of the sub-image display device 9051 at the current hold display number, which is set in the effect effect control pattern for executing the effect (step S90904). For example, when the hold change effect execution pattern is HP3'-2 and the hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern after shift is [3], the hold change effect that changes the hold display image from white to green is performed. Set up the production control pattern to be executed. When the hold change effect execution pattern is HP3'-2 and the hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern after shift is [1], the hold change effect that changes the hold display image from green to red is executed. Set the effect control pattern.

In this embodiment, a plurality of hold change effect execution patterns or action effect execution patterns are not stored, but as another embodiment, a plurality of hold change effect execution patterns or action effect execution patterns are stored. For each hold change effect execution pattern and action effect execution pattern When executing the hold change effect and action effect, a plurality of hold change effect and effect control patterns for executing the action effect are set as the patterns used this time. To do. At this time, a plurality of pending change effects and action effects may be executed at the same time or sequentially.

The hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern is different from the actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern, and the hold display effect or action effect is not executed. Case (step S90903; NO), or after step S90904, it is determined whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, and the call advance notice effect execution pattern, which is a pattern for executing the call advance notice effect when executing the call advance notice effect (step S90903; NO). Step S90905). The call notice effect is an effect in which a call screen for a predetermined character appears at the start of variable display of a decorative pattern. In step S90905, for example, whether or not to execute the call advance notice effect and the call advance notice effect execution pattern when executing the call advance notice effect are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 58.

The call advance notice effect execution pattern specifies the mode of calling a predetermined character when executing the call advance notice effect, and the call advance notice effect execution patterns YP1'-1 and YP1'-2 are prepared.

For example, the call advance notice effect execution pattern YP1'-1 is a call advance notice effect execution pattern in which the call advance notice effect is executed and a predetermined character calls "I don't want to do it".

For example, the call advance notice effect execution pattern YP1'-2 is a call advance notice effect execution pattern in which a call advance notice effect is executed and a predetermined character calls "Hey".

In step S90905, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter, and the call advance notice effect execution pattern when the call advance notice effect is executed. The numerical data indicating the random number value SR4'of is extracted. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR4', the presence or absence of execution of the call advance notice effect and the call advance notice when the call advance notice effect is executed are referred to by referring to the call advance notice effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. Determine the production execution pattern.

In the call advance notice effect execution decision table, for example, whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, which is the determination result, in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR4'depends on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. It suffices that it is assigned to the call notice effect execution patterns YP1'-1 and YP1'-2 when the call notice effect is executed.

The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, which is assigned to the decision value matching the random number value SR4'extracted this time according to the winning determination result, in the call advance notice effect execution decision table. When executing, any one of the call advance notice effect execution patterns is determined as the effect execution pattern of the call advance notice effect when executing the current call advance notice effect.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 58, when the fluctuation pattern is "reach", the call advance notice effect is more easily executed than when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach", the opposite is true. Therefore, when the call advance notice effect is executed, the reach expectation that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode is higher than when it is not executed.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 58, when the fluctuation pattern is "reach", the call for the predetermined character becomes "hey", and the call notice effect execution pattern becomes "I don't want to do it". It is easier to select than the production execution pattern, and when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach", the call for the predetermined character becomes "I don't want to do it". It is easier to select than the notice effect execution pattern. For this reason, when the call notice effect is executed, the reach expectation is higher when the call of the predetermined character becomes "Hey" than when it becomes "I don't want to do it". For this reason, the call notice production in which the call of the predetermined character becomes "Hey" announces that the reach expectation is the highest, and the call notice production in which the call of the predetermined character becomes "I don't want to do it" , It is lower than "Hey ~", but it is announced that the reach expectation is higher than when the call announcement production is not executed.

After step S90905, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display this time specifies reach (step S90906).

When the variation pattern of the variable display this time specifies the reach (step S90906; YES), it is determined whether to execute the count-up notice effect (step S90907). The count-up notice effect is an effect in which a predetermined character counts up. The effect control CPU 90120 determines, for example, whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect at the determination rate shown in FIG. 59.

In step S90907, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR5'for determining whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR5', it is determined whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect by referring to the count-up notice effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the count-up notice effect execution decision table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR5'depends depending on whether the current fluctuation pattern specifies the execution of super reach or the execution of only normal reach. Within the range, it may be assigned to "with execution" or "without execution" as the decision result. In the count-up notice effect execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies whether the current fluctuation pattern specifies the execution of super reach or the execution of only normal reach for the decision value that matches the random number value SR5'extracted this time. When the decision value assigned according to whether or not it is "executed", it is decided to execute the count-up notice effect, and when the assigned decision result is "not executed", the count-up notice effect is executed. Decide not to.

As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 59, when the super reach is executed, the execution ratio of the count-up notice effect is high, and when only the normal reach is executed, the execution ratio of the count-up notice effect is low. When the production is performed, there is a high possibility that it will develop from normal reach to super reach.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether to execute the specific effect (step S90908). The specific effect is an effect of maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051, and it is possible to execute an effect in which the period of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in portrait orientation and the period of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in landscape orientation are different. Is. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the specific effect is executed at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 60, for example.

In step S90908, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR6'for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR6', the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined with reference to the specific effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the specific effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR6'is in a range different depending on whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed and the effect execution pattern of the call advance notice effect when the call advance notice effect is executed. Then, it suffices if it is assigned to "with execution" or "without execution" which is the decision result. In the specific effect execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, and executes the effect of the call advance notice effect when the call advance notice effect is executed, based on the determined value that matches the random number value SR6'extracted this time. When the determined value assigned according to the pattern is "executed", it is determined to execute the specific effect, and when the determined value assigned according to the pattern is "not executed", it is determined not to execute the specific effect.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 60, when the call advance notice effect is executed, the execution rate of the specific effect is high, and when the call advance notice effect is not executed, the execution rate of the specific effect is low, so that the call advance notice effect is executed. At that time, there is a high possibility that the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 60, when the call for the predetermined character is "I don't want to do it" when the call advance notice effect is executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is high and "Hey". When becomes, the execution rate of the specific effect is low, so when the call notice effect is executed and the call of the predetermined character is "I don't want to do it", the specific effect is executed and the sub image is displayed. There is a high possibility that the device 9051 will be turned sideways.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the specific effect is determined to be executed in step S90907 (step S90909), and when the specific effect is executed (step S90909; YES), the pattern is such that the specific effect is executed. A specific effect execution pattern is determined (step S90910). In step S90910, for example, the specific effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG.

The specific effect execution pattern specifies a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 sideways when executing the specific effect, and specific effect execution patterns TP1'-1 to TP1'-3 are prepared.

For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1 is a specific effect execution pattern that executes a specific effect and maintains the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for "1000 ms".

For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-2 is a specific effect execution pattern that executes the specific effect and maintains the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for "10000 ms".

For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1 is a specific effect execution pattern that executes the specific effect and maintains the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for "15000 ms".

In step S90910, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR7'for determining a specific effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR7', the specific effect execution pattern is determined with reference to the specific effect execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121.

In the specific effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR7'is a determination result in a range different depending on the variable display result specified by the display result specification command. It may be assigned to ~ TP1'-3.

In the specific effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 assigns one of the specific effect execution patterns assigned to the determined value matching the random number value SR7'extracted this time according to the variable display result to the effect of the specific effect this time. Determined as an execution pattern.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 61, when the variable display result is "big hit", the specific effect execution pattern that keeps the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for a long time keeps the sub-image display device 9051 sideways. Is easier to select than the short specific effect execution pattern, and when the variable display result is "missing", the specific effect execution pattern that keeps the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for a short time is the sub-image display device 9051. It is easier to select than a specific effect execution pattern that takes a long time to be maintained sideways. Therefore, the longer the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways when the specific effect is executed, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 sideways at "15000 ms" foretells that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 sideways at "10000 ms" is "15000 ms". The specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 sideways at "1000 ms" is lower than maintaining "10000 ms", foretelling that the expectation of a big hit is higher than maintaining "1000 ms", although it is lower than maintaining it. Foretell that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the specific production is not executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in step S90910 whether the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1 is determined as the effect execution pattern of the specific effect this time (step S90911), and if it is not the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1. (Step S90911; NO), a pseudo-ream effect execution pattern, which is a pattern for executing the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", is determined (step S90912).

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. It is possible to perform the effect display to be changed again up to a predetermined time after the temporary stop is performed by. The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the display of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the first temporary stop of all decorative symbols. The number of times the decorative symbol revariates in all of the areas 905L, 905C, and 905R may be sufficient.

In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", as an example, in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right", a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances of a special combination are used. A decorative pattern that is one of the types of loss combinations is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", a predetermined effect such as an image display, which is a re-variation effect, may be executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial variation. The re-variation effect is not limited to the one by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 905 or the sub-image display device 9051, and may include an arbitrary effect operation using various effect devices. Good.

As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, the LED is lit among a plurality of decorative LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream". It may be controlled so that the things increase one by one. Further, during each variable display period, the display color of the decorative LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting of the plurality of decorative LEDs may be controlled to change. ..

As a further example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, the effect model provided inside or outside the game area is controlled to operate during the period of the variation display by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream". You may. At this time, during each variation display period, the operation mode of the effect model may be controlled to change, or the operating model among the plurality of effect models may be controlled to change. ..

During the period of each variable display by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", it may be controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the image display device 905. Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound effect that is a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. In addition to some or all of these re-variable effects, or in place of some or all of these re-variable effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of production models, display of production images, sound effects Of the output of, it may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect in which a part or all of the output is combined. At this time, when the re-variation effect is executed by combining a plurality of types of effect modes, or when the re-variation effect is executed a plurality of times, as compared with the case where the re-variation effect is executed by only one type of effect mode When the effect mode is changed, the possibility that a predetermined game value such as the jackpot expectation is given and the possibility that the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player may be increased.

In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-ream fluctuation once to three times, and the decorative symbol is used. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of is started 2 to 4 times in a row. Then, when the number of pseudo-reams is large, the expectation of big hits is higher than when the number of pseudo-reams is small. Further, it may be controlled so that the generation rate of the effect changes depending on the number of pseudo-reams. For example, the pseudo-continuous variation may be performed twice to be "reach confirmed", and the pseudo-continuous variation may be performed three times to be "super reach confirmed". It should be noted that the number of pseudo-reams in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" may be executed up to a number of times more than 1 to 3 times, for example, 4 times or 5 times.

In step S90912, for example, the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 62.

The pseudo-ream effect execution pattern specifies the number of pseudo-reams when executing the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" and the dialogue of a predetermined character when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is terminated. , Pseudo-continuous production execution patterns GP1'-1 to GP1'-3 are prepared.

For example, the pseudo-ream effect execution pattern GP1'-1 is a predetermined character when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" having one pseudo-ream count is executed and the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is terminated. This is a pseudo-continuous production execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes "Peace!".

For example, in the pseudo-ream effect execution pattern GP1'-2, the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" having two pseudo-reams is executed, and the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is terminated. This is a pseudo-continuous production execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes a "chance!"

For example, in the pseudo-ream effect execution pattern GP1'-3, the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" having three pseudo-reams is executed, and the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is terminated. This is a pseudo-continuous production execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes "Amazing!".

In step S90912, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR8'for determining a pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR8', the pseudo-continuous production execution pattern is determined with reference to the pseudo-continuous production execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121.

In the pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR8' differs depending on whether the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-2 or the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-3 is determined. Within the range, it may be assigned to the pseudo-continuous production execution patterns GP1'-1 to GP1'-3 that are the determination results.

In the pseudo-continuous production execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 assigns any of the pseudo-continuous production execution patterns assigned to the determination values matching the random number value SR8'extracted this time according to the specific production execution pattern to the present "pseudo-continuous production execution pattern". It is determined as an effect execution pattern of the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream".

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 62, in the case of the specific effect execution pattern “TP1'-3” having the highest expectation of big hit, it is easy to select the pseudo-ream effect execution pattern having a large number of pseudo-reams, and the specific effect execution. In the case of the specific effect execution pattern "TP1'-2", which has a lower expectation of a big hit than the pattern "TP1'-3", it is easy to select a pseudo-ream effect execution pattern with a small number of pseudo-reams. Therefore, when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed, the larger the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the expectation of a big hit. For this reason, the re-variable effect of "3 times" is executed, and the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren" in which the dialogue of the predetermined character at the end of the effect is "Amazing!" Foretells that the jackpot expectation is the highest. Then, the re-variation effect of "2 times" is executed, and the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren" in which the dialogue of the predetermined character at the end of the effect is "chance!" Is executed by the re-variation effect of "3 times". It is lower than when it is done, but it is foretold that the expectation of big hit is higher than when the "1 time" revariation effect is executed, and the "1 time" revariation effect is executed, and the predetermined at the end of the effect The variable display effect of "pseudo-ren" where the character's dialogue is "Peace!" Is lower than when the re-variable effect of "twice" is executed, but it is lower than when the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren" is not executed. Also foretells that the big hit expectation is high.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in step S90907 whether it is determined to execute the count-up advance notice effect (step S90913), and if there is execution (step S90913; YES), the specific effect is executed and the sub image is executed. A count-up notice effect execution pattern, which is a pattern for executing the count-up notice effect when the display device 9051 is maintained sideways, is determined (step S90914). In step S90914, for example, the count-up notice effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 63 (A).

The count-up notice effect execution pattern specifies the number of counts by a predetermined character when the count-up notice effect is executed, and count-up notice effect execution patterns YP2'-1 to YP2'-3 are prepared.

For example, the count notice effect execution pattern YP2'-1 is a count notice effect execution pattern that executes the count notice effect and counts up to the count "3" by a predetermined character.

For example, the count advance notice effect execution pattern YP2'-2 is a count advance notice effect execution pattern that executes the count advance notice effect and counts up to the count "4" by a predetermined character.

For example, the count notice effect execution pattern YP2'-3 is a count notice effect execution pattern that executes the count notice effect and counts up to the count "5" by a predetermined character.

In step S90914, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR9'for determining the count-up notice effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR9', the count-up advance notice effect execution pattern is determined with reference to the count-up advance notice effect execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121.

In the count-up notice effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the count-up advance notice effect execution pattern in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR9'is a determination result in a range different depending on the variable display result specified by the display result specification command. It may be assigned to YP2'-1 to YP2'-3.

In the count-up notice effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 assigns one of the count-up advance notice effect execution patterns assigned to the determined value matching the random number value SR9'extracted this time according to the variable display result. It is decided as the production execution pattern of the count-up notice production.

As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 63 (A), when the variable display result is "big hit", it is easy to select a count-up notice effect execution pattern having a large number of counts by a predetermined character, and the variable display result is " At the time of "loss", it is easy to select a count-up notice effect execution pattern in which the number of counts by a predetermined character is small. Therefore, when the count-up notice effect is executed, the larger the number of counts by the predetermined character, the higher the expectation of big hit. For this reason, the count-up notice effect that counts up to the count "5" by the predetermined character announces that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the count-up notice effect that counts up to the count "4" by the predetermined character. The count-up notice effect, which is lower than the count "5" but has a higher expectation of a big hit than the count "3" and counts up to the count "3" by a predetermined character, is lower than the count "4". Notice that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the count-up notice effect is not executed.

After step S90914, when the effect execution pattern of the specific effect this time is the specific effect execution pattern "TP1'-1" (step S90911; YES), or when the count-up notice effect is not executed (step S90913; NO). ), The variable display effect is executed according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the determined final stop symbol, and as a part of the variable display effect, the specific effect and the specific effect are executed, and the sub-image display device 9051 An effect control pattern capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the image has turned sideways is set as the pattern used this time (step S90915).

When the specific effect is not executed (step S90909; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is determined to execute the count-up notice effect in step S90907 (step S90916), and if it is executed (step S90916; YES), the count-up notice effect execution pattern, which is a pattern for executing the count-up notice effect when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction without executing the specific effect, is determined (step S90917). In step S90917, for example, the same processing as that of step S90914 is performed, and the count-up notice effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 63 (B).

As can be seen from the determination ratios of FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B), when the count-up notice effect is executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways, the specific effect is executed. When the variable display result is "big hit", the number of counts by the predetermined character is larger than when the count-up notice effect is executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in portrait orientation without executing. The up-notice effect execution pattern is easily selected, and when the variable display result is "missing", the count-up notice-effect execution pattern with a small number of counts by a predetermined character is easily selected. Therefore, even if the count-up notice effect has the same number of counts by a predetermined character, the big hit expectation of the count-up notice effect executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The degree is higher than the jackpot expectation degree of the count-up notice effect executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction without executing the specific effect.

After step S90917, or when the count-up notice effect is not executed (step S90916; NO), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display this time specifies super reach (step S90918).

When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display this time specifies super reach (step S90918; YES), whether or not the development time production is executed, and the development time production which is a pattern for executing the development time production when the development time production is executed. The execution pattern is determined (step S90919). The development time production is a production performed when developing from normal reach to super reach. In step S90919, for example, whether or not the development time effect is executed and the development time effect execution pattern when the development time effect is executed are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

The development time effect execution pattern specifies the mode of the effect when the development time effect is executed, and the development time effect execution patterns HP1'-1 and HP1'-2 are prepared.

For example, the development-time effect execution pattern HP1'-1 is a development-time effect execution pattern in which the "first character" acts on the decorative pattern.

For example, the development time production execution pattern HP1'-1 is a development time production execution pattern in which the "second character" acts on the decorative pattern.

In step S90919, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the development time effect is executed, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter, and the development time effect execution pattern when the development time effect is executed. The numerical data indicating the random number value SR10'for the purpose is extracted. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR10', the presence or absence of execution of the development time effect and the development time when the development time effect is executed with reference to the development time effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 and prepared. Determine the production execution pattern.

In the development time effect execution decision table, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the development time effect that is the determination result is determined in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR10'depends on the variable display result specified by the display result specification command. , It suffices that it is assigned to the development time effect execution patterns HP1'-1 and HP1'-2 when the development time effect is executed.

The effect control CPU 90120 executes the development time effect and whether or not the development time effect is executed, which is assigned to the determination value matching the random number value SR10'extracted this time according to the variable display result in the development time effect execution decision table. When this is done, one of the development-time production execution patterns is determined as the development-time production execution pattern when the current development-time production is executed.

As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 64, when the variable display result is "big hit", it is easier to execute the development effect than when the variable display result is "miss". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "missing", the opposite is true. For this reason, when the development time production is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 64, when the variable display result is "big hit", the development time effect execution pattern in which the "second character" acts on the decorative symbol and the "first character" act on the decorative symbol. It is easier to select than the development time production execution pattern, and when the variable display result is "miss", the development time production execution pattern in which the "first character" acts on the decorative pattern is decorated by the "second character". It is easier to select than the development effect execution pattern that acts on the pattern. For this reason, when the development effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the "second character" acts on the decorative symbol than when the "first character" acts on the decorative symbol. For this reason, the developmental production in which the "second character" acts on the decorative design foretells that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the developmental production in which the "first character" acts on the decorative design is the "first character". Although it is lower than ", the expectation for big hits is higher than when the production at the time of development is not executed.

After step S90919, if the current variable display variation pattern does not specify reach (step S90906; NO), or if the current variable display variation pattern does not specify super reach (step S90908; NO), the variation pattern or An effect control pattern that executes the variable display effect according to the determined combination of the final stop symbols and does not execute the specific effect or the like is set as the pattern used this time (step S90920).

After steps S90915 and S90920, the effect control pattern setting process ends.

Returning to FIG. 56, after step S90322, the effect control CPU 90120 initially sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern to the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122. It is set as a value (step S90323).

Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative symbol or the like in the image display device 905 and the variation of the small symbol in the sub-image display device 9051 is made. At this time, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123 based on the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in step S90322, the image is displayed. The "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the display area of the display device 905 start to change the decorative symbol, and the display area of the sub-image display device 9051. The variation of the small symbol may be started in the small symbol display area 9051V provided in.

After that, the display update setting of the hold display image is performed (step S90325). For example, if the received fluctuation start designation command is the first fluctuation start designation command, the area to the left of the display area 905H is transmitted by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The leftmost first hold display image of 905HA is erased, and each of the other first hold display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left. For example, if the received fluctuation start designation command is the second fluctuation start designation command, the area to the right of the display area 905H is transmitted by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The leftmost second hold display image of 905HB is erased, and each of the other second hold display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left.

As described above, the start winning command is newly stored in the start winning command buffer in response to the newly stored hold data in the special figure hold storage unit when the special figure game is held. .. Then, at this time, the hold display symbol is added in step S90682. At the start of the special figure game, the stored contents of the start winning command are shifted in step S90901 in response to the deletion of one hold data from the special figure hold storage unit. Then, at this time, in step S90325, one hold display symbol is erased, and the display position of the other hold display symbol is shifted. In this way, the hold display number and the hold number correspond to each other, and when the numbers are the same, the start winning command and the hold data and the special figure game corresponding to the hold data correspond to each other, and further, the same number. The hold display symbol of the display position corresponding to the hold display number of is also supported.

After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the variable display process (step S90326), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, various control data are read from the effect control pattern determined in step S90171 in response to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the decorative pattern is variable. It includes processing for performing various effect controls during display. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, the final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011. The process to make it is included. It should be noted that the final decoration symbol may be completely stopped and displayed in response to the fact that the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command elapses, the effect control board 9012 autonomously operates without using the effect control command from the main board 9011. The variable display result can be confirmed by deriving and displaying the fixed decorative symbol. After performing such effect control and the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure hit waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the effect control pattern for executing the effect during the jackpot game state is set as the use pattern, and the value of the effect process flag is "4". Update to. At this time, the timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern set as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received, it is determined whether the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed. For example, the elapse of the waiting time is determined by subtracting 1 from the value of the effect control process timer and determining whether the subtracted timer value is “0”. If the timer value after subtraction 1 is not "0", it means that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not elapsed, so this process is terminated as it is. If the timer value after 1 subtraction is "0", it means that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has elapsed. Therefore, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing". The value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", and this process ends.

The hitting process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this hit processing, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1, and is the same value as the timer value after decrementing 1 of the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern. The effect operation control is performed based on the effect control execution data associated with the process timer determination value. By repeatedly executing step S90174 for each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the jackpot game state.

In the hit processing, it is further determined whether or not the hit end designation command has been received, and if the hit end designation command has not been received, since each round game has not been completed, the value of the effect process flag is not updated. The process is terminated. Further, when the hit end designation command is received, it means that all the round games have been completed. Therefore, in order to start the execution of the ending effect, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to step S90175. Update to 5 ”and end the hit process. At the time of this update, the effect control pattern for iteming the ending is selected as the use pattern, and the timer initial value according to the execution time of the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer. The effect control pattern of the ending may be set in advance.

The ending process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the ending period has elapsed. For example, it is determined whether or not the data included in the effect control pattern associated with the process timer determination value which is the same value as the timer value obtained by subtracting 1 from the timer value of the effect control process timer is the end code. By doing so, it is determined whether the ending period has passed.

If the data included in the effect control pattern is not the end code and the ending period has not elapsed, the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the pattern to be used will be the same as the timer value after subtraction by 1. Based on the effect control execution data associated with the process timer determination value, the effect control of the ending is performed, and this process is terminated. By repeatedly executing step S90175 for each timer interrupt, execution of the ending effect is realized. When the data included in the effect control pattern is the end code, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", this process ends. When the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", the effect control process timer and various data such as the state of various flags and the value of the counter are appropriately reset.

Next, an example of the effect screen realized in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. In FIGS. 65 to 71, the arrows displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R and the small symbol display area 9051V indicate that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed.

First, with reference to FIG. 65, an example of an effect screen of a call advance notice effect, a specific effect, a notification effect, and a variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" will be described.

For example, if the call advance notice effect execution pattern YP1'-1 is determined in step S90905 of FIG. 57, the character image CA (character CA) is displayed on the image display device 905 after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the "spear" is displayed. A call announcement production that calls out "Takunai" will start (Fig. 65 (A)).

After that, for example, if the variation pattern of the variable display this time specifies the reach, the reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 65 (B)).

After that, for example, if it is decided in step S90908 of FIG. 57 to execute the specific effect, the character image CB (character CB) and the cliff image G (cliff G) are displayed on the sub-image display device 9051, and the image is displayed. A specific effect in which the character image CC (three character CCs) is displayed on the display device 905 is started (FIG. 65 (C)).

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (FIG. 65 (D)). At this time, the sub-image display device 9051 executes an effect in which the character CB jumps under the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction.

After that, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 turning sideways, the sub-image display device 9051 is notified that the sub-image display device 9051 has turned sideways by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided on the sub-image display device 9051. The notification effect is executed (FIG. 65 (E)). Further, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 being turned sideways, an effect in which the character CB and the three character CCs fight is executed.

After that, for example, if the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern GP1'-1 is determined in step S90912 of FIG. 57, the variable display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 65 (F)). At this time, the effect that the character CB defeats one of the three character CCs is executed.

After that, if the first (last) pseudo-continuous variation is started and, for example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-2 is determined in step S90910 of FIG. 57, the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction according to the elapse of "10000 ms" (FIG. 65 (G)). At this time, the sub-image display device 9051 executes an effect in which the character CB jumps onto the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. Further, in the image display device 905, an effect is executed in which one character CC defeated by the character CB remains collapsed and the remaining two character CCs escape.

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 is oriented vertically, and in response to the end of the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the effect that the character CB emits the line "Peace!" Is executed (FIG. 65 (H). )).

It is sufficient that the character CB defeats the character CC one by one each time the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is repeated. In that case, for example, if three character CCs are displayed, a maximum of three pseudo-ream fluctuations may be executed, and the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" is performed according to the number of character CCs. The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations may be suggested.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an example of an effect screen for a specific effect and a notification effect will be described.

For example, if it is decided in step S90908 of FIG. 57 to execute the specific effect, the character image CB (character CB) and the cliff image G (cliff G) are displayed on the sub-image display device 9051, and the image display device 905. A specific effect in which the character image CC (three character CCs) is displayed is started (FIG. 66 (A)).

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (FIG. 66 (B)). At this time, the sub-image display device 9051 executes an effect in which the character CB jumps under the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction.

After that, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 turning sideways, the sub-image display device 9051 is notified that the sub-image display device 9051 has turned sideways by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided on the sub-image display device 9051. The notification effect is executed (FIG. 66 (C)). Further, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 being turned sideways, an effect in which the character CB and the three character CCs fight is executed.

After that, for example, if the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1 is determined in step S90910 of FIG. 57, the sub-image is corresponding to the elapse of "1000 ms" after the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIG. 66 (D)). At this time, the sub-image display device 9051 executes an effect in which the character CB jumps onto the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction.

After that, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 being oriented vertically, an effect is executed in which the character CB emits a line of "Muri" (FIG. 66 (E)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, an example of an effect screen for the development effect will be described.

For example, if the development effect pattern HP1'-2 is determined in step S90919 of FIG. 57, after the decorative symbol to be the reach loss combination is temporarily stopped (FIG. 67 (A)), the sub-image display device 9051 is second. The development-time production in which the character image (second character CD) is displayed is started (FIG. 67 (B)).

After that, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the diagonal direction, the effect of moving the second character CD from the sub-image display device 9051 to the image display device 905 is executed (FIG. 67 (C). )).

After that, the second character CD acts on the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 905L on the "left", and the effect of changing to another decorative symbol is executed (FIG. 67 (D)).

After that, the second character CD acts on the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 905R on the "right", and the effect of changing to another decorative symbol that is a reach combination is executed (FIG. 67 (E). )).

After that, the second character CD acts on the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C, and the effect of restarting the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C is executed. (Fig. 67 (F)).

In this way, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the development effect is completed according to the rotation of the sub-image display device 9051 from the diagonal direction to the vertical direction (FIG. 67 (G)). It develops from normal reach to super reach (Fig. 67 (H)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, an example of the effect screen of the hold change effect and the action effect will be described.

When the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "4", for example, if the hold change effect execution pattern HP6'-2 is determined in step S90678 of FIG. 51, the left in the area 905HA. The hold change effect is started with the hold display image T displayed at the fourth display position as a target (FIG. 68 (A)). At this time, the character image CE (character CE) is displayed on the sub-image display device 9051.

After that, at the start of the next variable display, when one hold display symbol is erased and the display position of the other hold display symbol shifts, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the vertical direction to the diagonal direction, and the character CE Aims at the hold display image T of the target and shoots an arrow Y (FIG. 68 (B)).

After that, since the arrow Y does not hit the hold display image T of the target and the hold display image T of the target does not change, this action effect becomes an action failure effect (FIG. 68 (C)).

After that, at the start of the next variable display, when one of the hold display symbols is erased and the display position of the other hold display symbol shifts, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from diagonally to sideways. , A notification effect is executed by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided on the sub-image display device 9051 to notify that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways (FIG. 68 (D)), and the action effect is produced again. Is executed, but this action effect also fails in the action effect, and the hold display image T of the target does not change (FIG. 68 (E)).

After that, at the start of the next variable display, when one hold display symbol is deleted and the display position of the other hold display symbol shifts, the action effect is executed again (FIG. 68 (F)), and the arrow Y is the target. Since the hold display image T of the target is hit and the hold display image T of the target changes from white to red, this action effect is an action success effect (FIG. 68 (G)).

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction, and the hold change effect ends (FIG. 68 (H)).

Here, the game area includes a plurality of areas in which the area for hitting the game ball can be changed by the player's selection. The area on the left side is called the left game area, the area on the right side is called the right game area, and the game ball hit is either the left game area or the right game area, with the center of the game area in the left-right direction as the boundary. It is designed to enter.

Hitting a game ball aiming at the left game area so that the game ball flows to the left game area is called "left-handed", and hitting a game ball aiming at the right game area so that the game ball flows to the right game area. Is called "right-handed". That is, the game ball hit by the player by hitting left and right jumps out into the game area. Then, the left-handed game ball flows down the left game area. On the other hand, the right-handed game ball flows down the right game area. In this way, the player changes the area for hitting the game ball according to the player's choice, such as right-handed or left-handed, by changing the firing intensity of the hitting ball launching device according to the amount of operation of the hitting ball operating handle. be able to. It should be noted that innumerable flow paths of the game ball flowing down the left game area and the right game area are assumed.

For example, when the special variable winning ball device 907 is provided in the right game area, the player should hit right in the big hit game state. Therefore, in response to the variable display result being a "big hit", the right-handed instruction image S for instructing right-handedness is displayed above the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 (FIG. 69 (A)). ..

Then, at the start of the round game in the jackpot game state, the right-handed instruction image S is displayed, and the speakers 908L and 908R perform a voice notification prompting the right-handed person (FIG. 69 (B)).

Here, the right-handed instruction image S is an image in which two arc-shaped arrow images are displayed around the character image "right-handed". The arrow image points in the clockwise direction and rotates clockwise around the text image. As a result, even if the sub-image display device 9051 rotates clockwise as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 69 (D). Even so, the player can identify what should be right-handed by rotating the arc-shaped arrow image pointing in the clockwise direction clockwise.

As shown in FIG. 69A, the right-handed instruction image S displayed above the display area when the sub-image display device 9051 is in portrait orientation is such that the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. When the image is turned sideways, it is displayed on the right side of the display area as shown in FIG. 69 (C). As described above, even if the right-handed instruction image S instructing right-handedness is displayed on the right side of the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 that is oriented sideways, it does not cause misunderstanding of the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69A, the right-handed instruction image S displayed above the display area when the sub-image display device 9051 is in portrait orientation is 90 degrees counterclockwise by the sub-image display device 9051. When it is rotated and turned sideways, it is displayed on the left side of the display area as shown by a broken line in FIG. 69 (D). In this way, when the right-handed instruction image S instructing right-handedness is displayed on the left side of the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 that is oriented sideways, the right-handed person is instructed to hit right-handed. It may be misleading that left-handed strikes are instructed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the sub-image display device 9051 is vertically oriented and the right-handed instruction image S is displayed above the display area, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 69 (D), the sub-image display device is in the same position as when the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. By moving the right-handed instruction image S to the right side of the display area of 9051, the player is prevented from misunderstanding.

As shown in FIG. 70, it is also possible to execute the effect of rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then rotating it in the vertical direction a plurality of times during one variable display. In the example shown in FIG. 70, when the jackpot game state is finished and the time saving state is controlled, the time saving control is being performed by rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. Notifying (FIG. 70 (A)). Then, when the specific effect is executed during the time reduction control, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIGS. 70 (B) to 70 (C)), and then rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. A specific effect is executed by moving it (FIGS. 70 (C) to 70 (E)). Then, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction according to the completion of the specific effect (FIGS. 70 (E) to 70 (F)). After that, in order to notify that the time reduction control is being performed again, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (FIGS. 70 (F) to 70 (H)).

As shown in FIG. 71, the error notification image E for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 in response to the occurrence of the error. In that case, the display position of the error notification image E is a position where the entire error notification image E can be visually recognized without shifting the display position of the error notification image E when the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 changes. Even if a part of the error notification image E protrudes outside the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 and becomes invisible or difficult to see, the notification content by the error notification image E is set at a position where it can be specified.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of.

(Modification 1) In the above embodiment, the sub-image display device 9051 that can be rotated in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction has been described. However, the display device is not limited to the above embodiment as long as it can be displaced to a plurality of states. For example, the sub-image display device 9051 may be movable to a first position and a second position above, below, to the right, and to the left of the first position. Further, the sub-image display device 9051 is composed of two first sub-image display devices 9051A and a second sub-image display device 9051B, and the first sub-image display device 9051A and the second sub-image display device 9051B are combined. It may be possible to displace the first state and the second state in which the first sub-image display device 9051A and the second sub-image display device 9051B are separated. Further, the image display device 905 may be displaceable in a plurality of states, or the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051 may be displaceable in a plurality of states. According to such a configuration, it can be applied to various display devices.

(Modification 2) In the above embodiment, the character CB jumps under the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, and the sub-image display device 9051 performs an effect. The effect of the character CB jumping onto the cliff G in accordance with the motion of rotating from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction has been described. However, the display device may display a predetermined image in relation to the operation of displacing from the first state to the second state, and display a specific image in relation to the operation of displacing from the second state to the first state. It is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the aura of a predetermined character image increases in relation to the movement of the display device from the first state to the second state, and the display device becomes a predetermined movement in relation to the movement of the display device from the second state to the first state. The background image moves in the first direction in relation to the character image having a smaller aura or the display device being displaced from the first state to the second state, and the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state. The background image may move in the second direction opposite to the first direction in relation to the operation. In this way, the predetermined image displayed in relation to the operation of the display device being displaced from the first state to the second state and the predetermined image displayed in relation to the operation of the display device being displaced from the second state to the first state are displayed. The specific image may be an image that is related to each other. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effects associated with the displacement of the display device.

(Modification 3) In the above embodiment, the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is performed in connection with the operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 in the specific effect rotates from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then further rotates in the vertical direction. When the sub-image display device 9051 is in portrait orientation at the start of the specific effect, that is, at the start of the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", there is no dialogue of the predetermined character, and at the end of the specific effect, the sub-image display device 9051 Is described as being vertically oriented, that is, at the end of the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the effect accompanied by the dialogue of a predetermined character is executed. However, in relation to the operation of the display device being displaced from the first state to the second state and then further displaced to the first state, the first state before the displacement to the second state and the post-displacement to the second state. It suffices if the mode of the effect is different from that of the first state, and is not limited to that of the above embodiment. For example, different effects may be displayed between the first state before the displacement to the second state and the first state after the displacement to the second state, or before the displacement to the second state. Different sound effects may be output between the first state and the first state after the displacement to the second state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production accompanying the displacement of the display device.

(Modification 4) In the above embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern has been described as being determined according to the period for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 sideways, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed and the number of pseudo-ream fluctuations are defined for each fluctuation pattern, and the variable display of the "pseudo-ream" is executed according to the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 9011 side. When the above is specified, the period for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in landscape orientation may be determined according to the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations or the variable display time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the setting associated with the execution of the specific effect on the effect control board 9012 side.

(Modification 5) In the above embodiment, as a specific effect, an effect of maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a specific effect, one that maintains the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909, one that maintains the audio output mode of the speakers 908L and 908R, and one that maintains the display mode of a predetermined image displayed on the image display device 905. And so on. According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to various specific effects in which the mode of the effect is maintained.

(Modification 6) In the above-described embodiment, in the action effect, an effect in which a predetermined image hits the hold display image is defined as an action success effect, and an effect in which the predetermined image does not hit the hold display image is an action failure effect. However, "the predetermined image acts on the hold display image" is not limited to the one in which the predetermined image hits the hold display image. For example, both the action success effect and the action failure effect are effects in which an arrow shot by a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 hits the hold display image, but in the action failure effect, the hit arrow. The effect of being bounced or broken may be executed, and such an effect may not be executed in the action success effect. As described above, in the action effect, it is only necessary that the mode of the effect is different between the action success effect and the action failure effect, and the hold change effect is executed after the action effect to change the mode of the hold display image. It is assumed that the action effect is an action success effect, and it can be understood that the action effect is an action failure effect because the hold change effect is not executed after the action effect and the mode of the hold display image does not change. According to such a configuration, the production mode of the action production is not limited, and the interest of the action production can be improved.

(Modification 7) In the above embodiment, the first operation in which the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 is displaced from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and the second operation in which the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 is displaced from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. However, the description is limited to what is executed as a series of operations in a specific effect. For example, as a first effect, an effect of displacing the display device from the first state to the second state is executed, and as a second effect different from the first effect, the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state. The first operation in which the display device is displaced from the first state to the second state and the second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state are executed as a series of operations. It does not have to be. In that case, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on whether the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed or the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, even if the first operation and the second operation of the display device are not executed as a series of operations, the interest can be improved.

(Modification 8) In the above embodiment, the first operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counterclockwise to displace from the horizontal state and the sub-image display device 9051 are in the horizontal direction. However, the operation mode in which the first operation and the second operation are similar, such as the second operation of rotating clockwise and displacing to the vertical state, has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the first operation, the display device is continuously displaced from the first state to the second state, and in the second operation, the display device is intermittently displaced from the second state to the first state. The first operation in which the device is displaced from the first state to the second state and the second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state may be completely different operation modes. Further, one of a plurality of modes may be executed for each of the operation mode of the first operation and the operation mode of the second operation. In that case, which mode is the operation mode of the first operation, which mode is the operation mode of the second operation, or the combination of the operation mode of the first operation and the operation mode of the second operation. Depending on the situation, the jackpot expectation may be different. With such a configuration, the operation of the display device can attract more attention and the interest can be improved.

(Modification 9) In the above embodiment, in the first operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counterclockwise from the vertical state and is displaced to the horizontal state, an image of the character jumping under the cliff is displayed. In the second operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 is displayed and is displaced clockwise from the horizontal state to the vertical state, an image of the character jumping on the cliff is displayed. Not limited to this. A predetermined image displayed in connection with the first operation in which the display device is displaced from the first state to the second state and a second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state are displayed. The specific image may be one in which an image of any one of a plurality of modes is displayed. In that case, which mode is the predetermined image displayed in connection with the first operation, which mode is the specific image displayed in relation to the second operation, or the mode of the predetermined image. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on the combination with the mode of the specific image. Further, as in the modified example 8, when the mode of the first operation or the mode of the second operation is any one of a plurality of modes, a predetermined image or a specific image is displayed according to the mode of the operation. The ratio of which mode may be different may be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract more attention to a predetermined image or a specific image, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Modification 10) In the above embodiment, in the small symbol display area 9051V, a display mode that is common to all of the plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, a symbol that indicates a number as well as a portion that indicates a number in the decorative symbol. In the above description, an effect image showing a plurality of types of small symbols, each of which can be identified, is variably displayed as a broadcast information image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that is the display result, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode, or a pseudo-ream of a special combination. Even if a decorative symbol or a special symbol such as "re", which is one of a plurality of types of loss combinations predetermined as a chance eye, is temporarily stopped and displayed, in the small symbol display area 9051V, an effect image showing the small symbol is reached. It is also possible to display the same as during high-speed fluctuation without using a pseudo-continuous chance eye or a special symbol. Then, when the fixed decorative symbol is derived, an effect image showing the small symbol may be displayed in a manner common to all of the fixed decorative symbols. That is, in the small symbol display area 9051V, the effect may be such that the player can grasp whether or not the variable display is being performed by the effect image showing the small symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the variable display effect by the effect image showing the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9051V.

(Modification 11) In the above-described embodiment and Modification 1, for example, a display device composed of an LCD or the like is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a large number of LEDs are arranged in a matrix. It can also be applied to an accessory that displays by LED, or an accessory called a versa writer that displays characters and figures with an afterimage of light by rotating or reciprocating LEDs arranged in a row. In that case, for example, taking a versa writer as an example, a predetermined image is displayed with an afterimage of light in relation to the first operation in which the versa writer is displaced from a stationary state to a rotating state at a predetermined rotation speed, and the versa writer has a predetermined rotation speed. A specific image may be displayed as an afterimage of light in relation to the second operation of shifting from the rotating state to the stationary state. As described above, the present invention is applicable not only to a display device composed of an LCD or the like, but also to a game machine provided with various display devices.

In the above embodiment, one variation pattern is used when the variable display is started in order to notify the effect control CPU 90120 of the variation pattern indicating the variable display mode such as the variable display time of the decorative symbol and the type of reach effect. An example of transmitting a designated command has been shown, but the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, in the game control microcomputer 90100, as the first command, the presence or absence of variable display effects such as "slip" and "pseudo-ream", etc., are variable before reaching. A command indicating the display time and the variable display mode is transmitted, and as a second command, a command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode after the reach, such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect, is transmitted. You may do so. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 90120 selects the specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or the second command is sent after a predetermined time has passed after the first command is sent. You may try to do it. Further, the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored and prepared in advance as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as a variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, the slot machine. By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result of the variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each is derived and displayed. This is a gaming machine in which one game is completed and a prize can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, the features of the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in the above embodiment by the cooperation of the hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine and the software that performs a predetermined process. It suffices that it is configured to include all or part of.

In addition, various devices including the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. The effect operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but is based on the generation of a prize ball by enclosing the game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 901. , It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

Further, in the above embodiment, "different proportions" is not limited to those having different proportions due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those with different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0%.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown based on the fact that the jackpot type is determined to be probabilistic jackpots. , Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside is provided, and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation region in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols of "1" to "8" are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown, but the variable display is such an embodiment. Not limited to. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, the update timing of each random number may be different, or the update range of each random number may be different so that the random numbers may not be synchronized.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main board 9011 stores the random value determination table, and the main board 9011 uses the random number value determination table based on the random values extracted from the main board 9011 at the time of starting winning. Although the reference is shown, an example in which the random value determination process is executed, the effect control board 9012 receives the determination result determined by the main board 9011, and the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed based on the received determination result is shown. , The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the table for determining the random number value, and the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted from the main board 9011 from the main board 9011 and is based on the received random number value. The random value determination process may be executed with reference to the random value determination table, and the pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random value determination process may be performed on the effect control board 9012. Further, the random value determination process may be performed on both the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of the random numbers and execute the random value determination process, and may also receive the determination result determined by the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives a random number value and determines whether or not it will be a big hit, and if it is a big hit, it executes a determination of the type of big hit, and based on the random number value, the main board 9011 The determination result of the variation pattern type determined in is may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 9011.

Further, in the above embodiment, on the effect control board 9012 side, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. It was explained as. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is specified to maintain the mode of production. A period (secondary) for maintaining the first aspect as the specific effect, provided with a specific effect means capable of executing the effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing the specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). It is possible to perform different effects between the period for maintaining the image display device 9051 in the vertical orientation and the period for maintaining the second aspect (the period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal orientation), and the second aspect is maintained. The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the length of the period (for example, the longer the time that the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways when the specific effect is executed, the higher the expectation of big hit. Is high, etc.). As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

Further, when the second aspect is maintained, it is easier to execute another effect with a high expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first aspect is maintained (for example,). Even if the count-up notice effect has the same number of counts by a predetermined character, the jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways is It is higher than the jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect that is executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction without executing the specific effect). As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the mode of the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state by executing the other effect while the mode of the specific effect is maintained in the second aspect.

In addition, it is possible to execute a notification effect means for notifying that the mode of the specific effect has become the second aspect (for example, a notification effect for notifying that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways). A CPU 90120 for effect control, etc.) is further provided. This makes it easier to recognize that the mode of the specific effect has become the second mode.

Further, as the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect that gradually changes from the first aspect to the second aspect in response to a plurality of variable displays (for example, the hold change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. 55). HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-1 to HP7'-2, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest over a plurality of variable displays.

Further, a predetermined effect means capable of executing a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a call advance notice effect) is further provided, and depending on which aspect of the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect is executed. The ratio of the mode of the specific effect to the second mode is different (for example, when the call advance notice effect is executed and the call of the predetermined character is "I do not want to do it", the specific effect is executed. There is a high possibility that the sub-image display device 9051 will be turned sideways, etc.). As a result, it is possible to draw attention to a predetermined effect.

Further, during one variable display, it is possible to execute the effect of changing from the first aspect to the second aspect and then changing to the first aspect a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, a sub-image display). The effect of rotating the device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then rotating the device 9051 in the vertical direction is executed a plurality of times during one variable display, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in one variable display.

The present invention is suitably applied to a game machine capable of performing variable display.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st reserved storage display 9b 2nd reserved storage display 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 special Variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
130 Cross key 901 Pachinko game machine 902 Game board 903 Game machine frame 904A Special symbol display device 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Ordinary winning ball device 906B Ordinary variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L 909 Game effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A 1st start port switch 9022B 2nd start port switch 9023 Count switch 90100 Game control micro Computer 90101 ROM
90102 RAM
90103 CPU
90104 Random number circuit 90105 I / O
90120 Production control CPU
90121 ROM
90122 RAM
90123 Display control unit 90124 Random number circuit 90125 I / O

Claims (2)

It is a game machine that can play games
Volume adjustment operation means for adjusting the volume,
Luminance adjustment operation means for performing brightness adjustment,
It is provided with an adjusting means capable of performing a process of adjusting the volume based on the operation of the volume adjusting operating means and a process of performing the brightness adjusting based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operating means.
The adjusting means preferentially executes the process of lowering the volume when the operation of lowering the volume by the volume adjusting operating means and the operation of increasing the brightness by the brightness adjusting operating means are performed.
further,
A specific production means that can execute a specific production that maintains the mode of the production ,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state is provided.
Examples specific effect, a first time period to maintain the first aspect, it is possible Ru racemate different and the second period to maintain the second embodiment,
The length between the second phase in response to, at the time of the first length of time and the second length, Ri is Do different expectation controlled Advantageously advantageous state for the player,
The suggestion effect execution means
In the second period, the suggestion effect common to the first length and the second length can be executed.
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed.
It is easier to execute the second incitement effect in the second period than in the first period.
A game machine characterized by that. It is a game machine that can play games
Volume adjustment operation means for adjusting the volume,
Luminance adjustment operation means for performing brightness adjustment,
It is provided with an adjusting means capable of performing a process of adjusting the volume based on the operation of the volume adjusting operating means and a process of performing the brightness adjusting based on the operation of the brightness adjusting operating means.
The adjusting means preferentially executes the process of lowering the brightness when the operation of lowering the brightness by the brightness adjusting operating means and the operation of raising the volume by the volume adjusting operating means are performed.
further,
A specific production means that can execute a specific production that maintains the mode of the production ,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state is provided.
As the specific effect, the period for maintaining the first aspect, it is possible Ru racemate different and period for maintaining the second embodiment,
The length between the second phase in response to, at the time of the first length of time and the second length, Ri is Do different expectation controlled Advantageously advantageous state for the player,
The suggestion effect execution means
In the second period, the suggestion effect common to the first length and the second length can be executed.
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed.
It is easier to execute the second suggestion effect in the second period than in the first period.
A game machine characterized by that.